Está en la página 1de 307

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS Radio Network Planning


All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 1

Blank Page
112

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 2

Objectives
113

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 By the end of the course, participants know:


 GPRS Session Management,
 TBF Management,

 Location Management,

 System Information Management,


 Cell Selection and Re-selection,

 Power Control and RLC Measurements,


 Coding Scheme and Link Adaptation,
 Radio Resources Re-allocation,
 (E)GPRS Planning Principles,
 (E)GPRS Network Planning,

 Network Evolution Scenarios,

 (E)GPRS QoS Enhancement Features,

 (E)GPRS with GSM Capacity Enhancement Features

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 3

Objectives
114

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 4

Table of Contents
115

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

Switch to notes view!

Page

1 Basics
1.1 Service Overview GPRS
1.2 Service Overview EGPRS
1.3 Support of GPRS QoS classes
1.3.1 Radio Network Planning Impact
1.4 Dual Transfer Mode
1.4.1 Radio Network Planning Impact
1.5 (E)GPRS MS Multislot Classes
1.6 (E)GPRS General Architecture
1.7 Alcatel (E)GPRS Architecture
1.8 (E)GPRS Protocol Layers (Transmission Plane)
1.9 Alcatel (E)GPRS BSS Hardware support
1.10 Modulation Technique: 8-PSK only for EGPRS
1.11 8-PSK TRA Power Aspects
1.12 (E)GPRS Radio Blocks Structure
1.13 GPRS Channel Coding
1.14 EGPRS Channel Coding
1.15 Radio Link Adaptation Overview
1.16 Automatic ReQuest for repetition (ARQ)
1.17 Type-I ARQ mechanism
1.18 Type-I ARQ in GPRS
1.19 Type-I ARQ in EGPRS
1.20 (E)GPRS radio physical channel: PDCH Concept
1.21 (E)GPRS Multiframe
1.22
Logical Channels
EVOLIUM
BSS -(E)GPRS
GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network
Planning
1.23 Master/Slave
PDCH concept All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
1.24 Temporary Block Flow
1.25 Resources Sharing
1.26 MS multiplexing co-ordination
1.27 GPRS mobility management (GMM) states for MS
1.28 Radio Resource (RR) operating modes for MS
1.29 Attach procedure
1.30 PDP context activation
1.31 Location management
1.32 Routing Area
1.33 Network Mode of Operation (NMO)
1.34 TBF establishment
1.35 UL TBF establishment on CCCH, 1 phase access
1.36 UL TBF establishment on CCCH, 2 phases access
1.37 DL TBF establishment on CCCH
1.38 System information broadcasting on BCCH
1.39 System information broadcasting on PBCCH
1.40 (E)GPRS Transmission Aspects
1.40 TRX Classes Concept
1.41 Two Abis Links per BTS
2 B9 features
2.1 Enhanced Packet Cell Reselection (R4 MSs)
2.1.1 Radio Network Impact
2.2 Extended Uplink TBF Mode
2.2 Radio Network Planning Impact
2.3 Enhanced support of E-GPRS (EDGE) in uplink
2.3.1 Radio Network Planning Impact
2.4 Counter Improvements for Release B9
2.4.1 Radio Network Planning Impact
2.5 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 5

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
22
23
24
25
29
31
34
39
40
41
42
43
47
48
49
51
52
54
58
61
62
63
65
66
67
68
69
70
72
74
75
77
80
81
84
85
86
87
88
89
91
93
94
98
99

Table of Contents [cont.]


116

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

Switch to notes view!

Page

2.5.1 Radio Network Planning Impact


2.6 2G/3G Inter-working
2.6.1 Radio Network Planning Impact
2.7 M-EGCH Statistical Multiplexing
2.7.1 Radio Network Planning Impact
2.8 Dynamic Abis allocation
2.8.1 Radio Network Planning Impact
2.9 Enhanced transmission resource management
2.10 RMS_I1 Improvements
2.10.1 Radio Network Planning Impact
2.11 RMS_I2 Improvements
2.11.1 Radio Network Planning Impact
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.1 Cell Reselection Overview
3.2 Cell reselection: NC0 mode, no PBCCH established
3.3 Cell reselection: NC0 mode, PBCCH established
3.4 Cell reselection execution: NC0 in PTM
3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode
3.6 GPRS redirection
3.7 GPRS Power Control: Overview
3.8 GPRS Power Control: Measurements
3.9 GPRS Power Control: Algorithm
3.10 Link adaptation: DL GPRS Radio Link Control
3.11 Link adaptation: UL GPRS Radio Link Control
3.12
adaptation
in EGPRS: New metrics
EVOLIUM
BSS -Link
GPRS and
EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
Radio Network
Planning
3.13 Link
adaptation: DL EGPRS Radio
Link Control
3.14 EGPRS Link Adaptation Decision
3.15 TRX ranking/TRX transmission pool set-up
3.16 TRX capability for PS traffic
3.17 Radio Resource Allocation: Overview
3.18 Radio Resource Allocation: PDCH state
3.19 TRX selection for EGPRS TBFs
3.20 Radio Resource Allocation: EGPRS TBFs
3.21 Radio Resource Allocation: TBF Re-allocation
3.22 Radio Resource Allocation: Min_PDCH
3.23 Radio Resource Allocation: Fast initial (E)GPRS access
4 General (E)GPRS planning principels
4.1 Throughput Dependency -> Interference (and Level)
4.2 Packet data throughput
4.3 Reference performance point
4.4 Saturation effect
4.5 Cell area and throughput
4.6 Throughput <-> C/I
5 (E)GPRS Network intoduction
5.1 GPRS network planning
5.2 GPRS Greenfield planning
5.3 GPRS traffic calculation and traffic analysis
5.4 GPRS traffic calculationand PS traffic
5.5 GPRS traffic calculation and user profile
5.6 GPRS traffic calculation and market applications
5.7 GPRS traffic calculation and user behavior
5.8 Customer questionnaire
5.9 Traffic Model (Example)
5.10 User mapping
5.11 Multi-Service

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 6

101
102
105
106
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
121
123
130
132
143
145
146
150
153
157
160
161
163
164
166
167
168
171
176
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
188
189
191
192
193
195
196
198
199
200
201
203
204
205

Table of Contents [cont.]


117

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

Switch to notes view!

Page

5.12 QoS per User Application


5.13 GPRS traffic calculation
5.14 Exemplary results of the 3 traffic calculation methods
5.15 GPRS traffic calculation result
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.1 General
6.2 Frequency planning
6.3 Throughput
6.4 Link budget
6.5 Interference analysis on BCCH frequencies
6.6 Interference analysis on TCH frequencies
6.7 TRX assignment to GPRS service
6.8 GPRS Analysis
6.9 LA and RA planning
6.10 Quality of Service
7 Considerabele features to react (E)GPRS target
7.1 General
7.1 Optimization campaign on parameters
7.2 MPDCH
7.3 Enhanced PDCH Adaptation & Fast pre-emption
7.4 User multiplexing
7.5 PDCH Resource Multiplexing
7.6 Radio (TBF) Resource Reallocation
7.7 Coding Scheme Adaptation
7.8
EVOLIUM
BSSCell
- GPRSReselection
and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
Radio Network
Planning
7.8 GPRS
Power Control
7.8 Features on DL TBF establishment and release
7.8.1 Delayed DL TBF release
7.8.2 Fast Downlink TBF re-establishment process
7.8.3 Non-DRX feature
8 GPRS introduction into oerational GSM network
8.1 General
9 GSM Network enhancement features & GPRS
9.1 Frequency Hopping
9.2 -cell
9.3 Dual Band
9.4 Concentric cell
10 E-GPRS
10.1 E-GPRS main differences
11 GPRS traffic calculation example
11.1 Customer questionnaire (Example)
11.2 User and area distribution determination
11.3 Traffic demand for CS traffic
11.4 Traffic demand for packet traffic
11.5 Network capacity calculation
11.6 Traffic dimensioning

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 7

206
207
212
217
218
219
222
224
225
228
229
230
231
235
245
248
249
250
251
254
255
256
257
259
260
262
263
264
266
267
268
269
275
276
278
280
283
284
285
288
289
291
292
293
297
301

Blank Page
118

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 8

119

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

1 Basics

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 9

1 Basics

1.1 Service Overview GPRS


1 1 10

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 GPRS General Packet Radio Service


 GPRS is a GSM feature

 It has been introduced to provide end-to-end packet-switched (PS)

data transmission between MS users and fixed packet data networks


 GPRS provides efficient utilization of the radio resources:
 multislot operation

 flexible sharing of radio resources between MS

 resources are allocated only when data are transmitted

 Charging is mainly based on data volume transmitted and not on the

connection time

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 10

1 Basics

1.2 Service Overview EGPRS


1 1 11

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 EDGE Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution


 ETSI standardized solution and can be introduced in two ways:
 CS enhancement: Enhanced circuit-switched data or ECSD
 PS enhancement for GPRS  EGPRS

 EGPRS relies on the introduction of 8-PSK (Eight Phase Shift Keying)

modulation technique:

 Same qualities in terms of generating interference on an adjacent

channel as GMSK  makes possible to integrate EDGE channels into


existing frequency plan
 8-PSK Symbol rate = GMSK Symbol rate, but one symbol represents now 3
bits instead of 1 bit in GMSK  increased data rates

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 11

1 Basics

1.3 Support of GPRS QoS classes


1 1 12

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Four QoS classes (or traffic classes) are defined:

 The conversational class will be very likely dedicated to real-time

conversation. Speech and video conferencing tools are some


examples of such applications
 The streaming class corresponds to a real-time stream and enforces
mainly constraints on jitter. Video streaming or PoC (Push to tak
over Celullar) are typical applications for the streaming traffic class.
 The interactive class corresponds to mainly to traditional Internet
applications like web browsing. Some differentiation can be done
between two services by using the traffic handling priority attribute.
 The background class is typically corresponding to Best Effort
services. Applications that make use of this class might be e-mail
downloading, SMS, or even ftp downloading.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 PFC procedure

Packet Flow Context (PFC) is a concept introduced starting with R99 3GPP release to ensure that the
BSS is involved in the R99 QoS negotiation. The interest of PFC is to differentiate on the radio
interface the conversational and streaming traffics and to reserve resources for these traffics.
Without the PFC, the BSS only knows the R97/98 QoS parameters (correspond to the interactive and
background R99 QoS classes). It enables to perform admission control and QoS based resource
allocation in the BSS.

R99 QoS is taken into account if the PFC (Packet Flow Context) procedures are supported by the MS,
the BSS and the SGSN. It allows the BSS B9 to handle streaming and interactive traffics and also to
negotiate the QoS parameters.

R97/98 QoS should be also taken into account (OP12) if PFC is not supported by the MS or the SGSN in
order to handle interactive traffics or some specific applications as PoC (Push over Cellular).

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 12

1 Basics

1.3.1 Radio Network Planning Impact


1 1 13

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 QoS subfeatures are of great interest in traffic-driven networks

(number of sites determined by the traffic to be carried, not by the


coverage per site). They will define the actual traffic shape in the
cell by allocating, in a selective manner, resources for (CS and) PS
calls. Here a traffic capacity gain is expected (higher traffic levels
can be handled with feature activated than without).

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 Radio interface impact

a) Support of PFC feature by RLC/MAC :

- PFC_FEATURE_MODE: this 1 bit field is a part of the R99 extensions in the GPRS_Cell_Options. It is
broadcasted on BCCH (SI13) or PBCCH (PSI1, PSI13 and PSI14) and indicates to the MSs if the network supports
the PFC feature.

- The PFC impact on the one phase access: "If the PFC_FEATURE_MODE is set in the system information and if a
PFC exists for the LLC data to be transferred then the PFI shall be transmitted along with the TLLI of the
mobile station in the RLC extended header during contention resolution. The PFI is not used for contention
resolution but is included to indicate to the network which PFC shall initially be associated with the uplink
TBF.

b) RLC/MAC/ messages impacts:

- PI bit (PFI indicator) is created, it indicates the presence of the optional PFI field:
0 PFI is not present

1 PFI is present if TI field indicates presence of TLLI

The PFI field indicates a PFI coded as it is defined in TS 44.018.

 RLC/MAC messages impacted are:

Packet Resource Request : PFI field is added

(EGPRS) Packet DL ACK/NACK: PFI field is added (if a Channel Request Description is also present)

UL (EGPRS) RLC data blocks : PFI field is added after the TLLI field (see 44.060 10.2.2 and 10.3a.2).

 PFI is included in the following SM messages :

Activate_PDP_Context_Accept,

Activate_Secundary_PDP_Context_Accept,

Modify_PDP_Context_Request (sent by the network) and

Modify_PDP_Context_Accept (in case the request to modify is sent by the MS).

 PFC_FEATURE_MODE is included in the MS_Network_Capability I.E. (which is sent in the Attach_Request and

RA_Update_Request GMM messages).

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 13

1 Basics

1.4 Dual Transfer Mode


Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

!!!!! B10 FEATURE ONLY !!!!

1 1 14

 This feature allows a dual transfer mode capable MS to use a radio








resource for CS traffic and simultaneously one or several radio


resources for PS traffic.
Single slot operation DTM MSs are not supported in Alcatel BSS
because the implementation of these MSs is difficult compared to
the throughput expected in PS services. Only multislot operation
DTM MSs are supported.
In Alcatels implementation, the Gs interface is required to support
DTM to ensure CS paging co-ordination. It avoids the BSS to ensure
the paging co-ordination.
While in dual transfer mode, the BSS only allocates full rate PDCH to
the MS.
The dynamic Abis feature allows to simplify the radio resource
allocations. It avoids defining new TBF re-allocation triggers.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 14

1 Basics

1.4.1 Radio Network Planning Impact


!!!!! B10 FEATURE ONLY !!!!

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

1 1 15

 Some restrictions towards BSS in deploying DTM exist. They are

presented below:
 Half rate


Support of half rate configurations (one single timeslot encompassing one half
rate circuit channel + one half rate packet channel) was not considered in the
first implementation of DTM.

 Inter-cell handovers


The number of inter-cell handovers should be minimized for DTM calls, as an


inter-cell HO leads to the re-allocation of the packet session. Therefore,
handover causes having a low priority should be inhibited for the time the MS
is operating in DTM.

 Intra-cell handovers


The number of intra-cell handovers should be minimized for DTM calls, as an


intra-cell HO leads to the re-allocation of the packet session.

 Hierarchical networks


As (E)GPRS are preferentially offered in macro cells, the BSS shall ensure that
at least one PDCH can be used in micro cells to re-direct the MS towards the
macro cells. It means that the BSS shall allow a PDCH used by a MS operating in
DTM mode to be shared by other (E)GPRS MS.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 15

1 Basic

1.5 (E)GPRS MS Multislot Classes


1 1 16

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

EGPRS MS is characterized by two multislot classes:


 GPRS multislot class

 EGPRS multislot class

 Typically, EGPRS multislot class < GPRS multislot class

E.g. the multislot class of the mobile can be 3 RXs + 2 TXs (class 6) in pure GPRS
mode and 2 RXs + 1 TX (class 2) in pure EGPRS mode

 Type 1: class 1-12, class 19-29 recognized as class 10

 Type 2: class 13-18, allocation is limited to max. 5+5 timeslots

Multislot
Class

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

RX Timeslots 1 2 2 3 2 3 3 4 3

TX Timeslots 1 1 2 1 2 2 3 1 2

5 n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.

Sum of
Timeslots

2 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 5

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 MS type

Type 1 are simplex MSs, i.e., without duplexer: they are not able to transmit and receive at the same time

Type 2 are duplex MSs, i.e., with duplexer: they are able to transmit and receive at the same time

Rx

Tx

SUM

The meaning of Ttb, Tra et Trb changes regarding MS types.

The maximum number of received time slots that the MS can use per TDMA frame. The receive TS shall be
allocated within window of size Rx, but they do not need to be contiguous. For SIMPLEX MS, no transmitted
TSs shall occur between receive TS within a TDMA frame. This does not take into account the measurement
window (Mx).
The maximum number of transmitted time slots that the MS can use per TDMA frame. The transmitted TS
shall be allocated within the window of size Tx, but they do not need to be contiguous. For SIMPLEX MS, no
received TS shall occur between transmit TS within a TDMA frame.
The maximum number of transmitted and received time slots (without Mx) per TDMA frame.

For SIMPLEX MS (type 1):

- Ttb is the minimum time (in time slot) necessary between the Rx and Tx windows.

- Tra is the minimum time between the last Tx window and the first Rx window of the next TDMA in
order to be able to open a measurement window.

- Trb is the same as Tra without opening a measurement window.

For DUPLEX MS (type 2):

- Ttb is the minimum time necessary between 2 Tx windows belonging to different frames.

- Tra is the minimum time necessary between 2 Rx windows belonging to different frames in order to be
able to open a measurement window.
- Trb is the same as Tra without opening a measurement window.
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 16

1 Basics

1.6 (E)GPRS General Architecture


1 1 17

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 (E)GPRS defines a network architecture dedicated to packet service

domain, with radio access, which allows service subscriber to send


and receive data in an end-to-end packet transfer mode
 (E)GPRS uses the BSS architecture, but defines a fixed network
(GPRS backbone) which is different from the NSS, and which links
the BSS to PDNs (packet data networks). The BSS is used for both
circuit-switched and (E)GPRS services
 The BSS has 2 clients:
 the MSC, for circuit-switched services (A interface)

 the GPRS backbone network, for GPRS (Gb interface)

one or more 64 kbit/s channels on one or more 2 Mbit/s links


 Gb interface: Layer 1 specified in GSM 08.14
The protocol stack defined in the stage 2, GSM 03.60


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 17

1 Basics

1.6 (E)GPRS General Architecture [cont.]


1 1 18

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 (E)GPRS general architecture


A
Interface

PSTN

MSC/VLR

Circuit Switched services domain

BSS

Gb
Interface

GPRS
backbone

PDN
Gi

Packet Switched services domain

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 GPRS network = IP network

Note: Additional IP routers might be used to route the information between the GSNs (intra-PLMN
backbone network). All the elements connected to this backbone have private permanent IP
addresses.

 Signaling protocols:

MAP/TCAP/SCCP/MTP on Gr, Gd and Gc (through the SGSN for the latter),


GTP/UDP/IP on Gn, BSSAP+/SCCP/MTP on Gs,
GMM/SM/LLC on Gb/Um.

 Gc: for Network-Requested PDP contexts Activation (the GGSN asks the HLR for SGSN Routing

Information).

 Gs: defines the Network Mode of Operation I. It allows to perform LA + RA combined Location Update,

and PS and CS Paging Coordination.

 Gr: exchange of Subscription Information at Attachment Phase.


 Additional interfaces:

Gf (to the EIR).

Gd to deliver the SMS to the mobiles via the GPRS network (SGSN option and subscriber feature).

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 18

1 Basics

1.7 Alcatel (E)GPRS Architecture


1 1 19

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Packet Control Unit (PCU) function is defined by the GSM standard:


 controls the (E)GPRS activity in a cell
 handles RLC/MAC functions

 may be either implemented in the BTS, BSC or the SGSN

 Alcatel choice:

 PCU implemented in a new network element, A 9135 MFS (Multi-BSS Fast

Packet Server)
 smooth and cost effective introduction of the GPRS

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 The standard specifies that the PCU function shall be implemented in one of the 3 following entities:

BTS,

BSC,

after the BSC (in the SGSN for instance)

 The implementation of the PCU functions determines the position of the Gb interface. ALCATEL chose

the MFS integration in order to offer a faster implementation inside the BSS as well as an easier
maintenance and supervision.

 MFS: Multi BSS Fast packet Server.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 19

1 Basics

1.7 Alcatel (E)GPRS Architecture [cont.]


1 1 20

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Alcatel packet-switched service domain architecture:

Packet domain
BTS

BSC
Abis

MFS
Ater

SGSN
Gb

GGSN

Fire-

Other
PLMN

wall

Gn

MS

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

Gp

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 20

Gi

Internet/
Intranet

1 Basics

1.7 Alcatel (E)GPRS Architecture [cont.]


1 1 21

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 GPRS backbone is an IP network and is composed of routers:

 Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN), at the same hierarchical level as the

MSC, which is linked to several BSSs. It keeps track of the individual MSs
location and performs security functions and access control
 Gateway GPRS Support Node (GGSN), which is linked to one or several
data networks, provides interworking with external packet-switched
networks and is connected with SGSNs via an IP-based GPRS backbone
network

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 21

1 Basics

1.8 (E)GPRS Protocol Layers (Transmission Plane)


1 1 22

Application example

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS


www

World Wide Web

http

Hypertext Transfer
Protocol

TCP

Transmission Control
Protocol
RFC 793

IP

IP

Internet Protocol
RFC 791

SNDCP

SNDCP

LLC

Logical Link Control


GSM 04.64

RLC

RLC

Radio Link Control


GSM 04.60

relay

Radio Link Control


GSM 04.60

MAC

BSSGP

Medium Access
Control
GSM 04.60

relay
Physical L2-GCH
Layer 2 GPRS
Link Layer
Channel

Physical
Link Layer

Physical
RF Layer

Physical
RF Layer

BSS GPRS Protocol

GSM 08.18

GSM 08.18

NS

NS

Um

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

Layer 2 GPRS
Channel

L1-GCH

Layer 1 GPRS
Channel

BTS

Network Service
GSM 08.16

L2-GCH

L1-GCH

Layer 1 GPRS
Channel

Abis / Ater

BSSGP

BSS GPRS Protocol

MAC

Medium Access
Control
GSM 04.60

MFS

Network Service
GSM 08.16

L1bis

L1bis

Layer 1bis
GSM 08.14

Layer 1bis
GSM 08.14

Gb

GTP

GTP

GPRS Tunneling
Protocol
GSM 09.60

GPRS Tunneling
Protocol
GSM 09.60

LLC

Logical Link Control


GSM 04.64

MS

relay

Subnetwork
Dependent
Convergence
Protocol
GSM 04.65

Subnetwork
Dependent
Convergence
Protocol
GSM 04.65

Internet Protocol
RFC 791

UDP

UDP

User Datagram
Protocol
RFC 768

or:

User Datagram
Protocol
RFC 768

or:

TCP

TCP

Transmission Control
Protocol
RFC 793

Transmission Control
Protocol
RFC 793

Internet Protocol
RFC 791

Internet Protocol
RFC 791

IP

IP

Ethernet
FR

Ethernet
FR

Frame Relay

or:

Frame Relay

or:

ATM

and/or:

and/or:

E1 (PCM30)

E1 (PCM30)
G.703 / G.704

SGSN

ATM

Asynchronous
Transfer Mode

Asynchronous
Transfer Mode

G.703 / G.704

Gn

GGSN

Gi

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 For the exact purposes of the tracing, please refer to Introduction to GPRS & E-GPRS Quality of

Service Monitoring It can be said from this protocol stacks diagram that after allocation of a GCH by
the BSC to the MFS, the data carried over the GCH are transparent for the BSC.

 The RLC function defines the procedures for segmentation and reassemble of LLC PDUs into RLC/MAC

blocks and, in RLC acknowledged mode of operation, for the Backward Error Correction (BEC)
procedures enabling the selective retransmission of unsuccessfully delivered RLC/MAC blocks. In RLC
acknowledged mode of operation, the RLC function preserves the order of higher layer PDUs provided
to it. The RLC function provides also link adaptation. In EGPRS in RLC acknowledged mode of
operation, the RLC function may provide Incremental Redundancy (IR).

 The MAC function defines the procedures that enable multiple mobile stations to share a common

transmission medium, which may consist of several physical channels. The function may allow a
mobile station to use several physical channels in parallel, i.e., use several time slots within the TDMA
frame. For the mobile station originating access, the MAC function provides the procedures, including
the contention resolution procedures, for the arbitration between multiple mobile stations
simultaneously attempting to access the shared transmission medium. For the mobile station
terminating access, the MAC function provides the procedures for queuing and scheduling of access
attempts.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 22

1 Basics

1.9 Alcatel (E)GPRS BSS Hardware support


1 1 23

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 BTS: Support of EGPRS (EDGE) in all BTS A9100 EVOLIUM Evolution

equipped with TRA transceiver:

G1 MK2 and G2 with DRFU: GPRS only, CS-1 and CS-2 only
 A9100 EVOLIUM (G3): GPRS only, CS 1-4
 A9100 EVOLIUM Evolution (G4): (E)GPRS, CS 1-4, MCS 1-9


 micro BTS: support of EDGE in micro BTS A9110-E





Micro BTS A9110 (M4M): GPRS only, CS 1-4


Micro A9110-E (M5M): (E)GPRS, CS 1-4, MCS 1-9

 BSC A9120 (G2)


 MFS A9135

 TC A9125 (Transcoder)


G2 and G2.5

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 23

1 Basics

1.10 Modulation Technique: 8-PSK only for EGPRS


1 1 24

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 8-PSK = Phase Shift Keying

 8-PSK is not a constant envelope modulation. Part of the information

is conveyed by the amplitude of the carrier which varies over time

 An 8PSK signal carries three bits per modulated symbol over the radio

path which allows to tripled the data transmission rates


Q

011

010

001

dB

001
000

100

111

101

110

000

100

011

011

001

101

111

111

010

010

000

Q
110

PN

101

110

-20

100
(147 bits)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 GMSK = the Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying belongs to a subset of phase modulations
 8-PSK = 8-state Phase Shift Keying

8-PSK is not a constant envelope modulation. Part of the information is conveyed by the
amplitude of the carrier which varies over time.
An 8-PSK signal carries three bits per modulated symbol over the radio path, which allows to
triple the data transmission rates.
 Modulation gross bit rate
The normal burst is divided into 156.35 symbol periods. A normal burst has a duration of 3/5.2
seconds (577 s). (3GPP TS 05.02).
For GMSK modulation, a symbol is equivalent to a bit (3GPP TS 05.04)
A GMSK burst is composed of 156.35 bits (6 tail bits + 26 training sequence bits + 116 encrypted
bits + 8.25 guard period (bits))
Modulation gross bit rate = (156.35 bits) / (3/5.2 seconds) = 270 Kbit/s
 For 8-PSK modulation, one symbol corresponds to three bits (3GPP TS 05.04).
An 8-PSK burst is composed of 156.35 x 3 = 468.75 bits (18 tail bits + 78 training sequence bits +
348 encrypted bits + 24.75 guard period (bits)).
Modulation gross bit rate = (468.75 bits) / (3/5.2 seconds) = 810 Kbit/s
GMSK

8-PSK

Modulation type

Frequency modulation

Phase modulation

Channel spacing
Gross bit rate per
carrier
Carrier envelope

200 KHz

200 KHz

270 Kbit/s
constant

810 Kbit/s

Amplitude varies

Packet radio service

GPRS / EGPRS

EGPRS

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 24

1 Basics

1.11 8-PSK TRA Power Aspects


1 1 25

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Nominal output power (PN) of the transmitter represents the

average power during the active burst

 GMSK average power is identical to GMSK peak power

 8-PSK peak power is equal to GMSK peak power but the 8-PSK average

power is lower than the peak power


 8-PSK power < GMSK power
 the difference is called average power decrease (APD) or power
back off
TRA

GMSK output power

8-PSK output power

900 MP

45 W / 46.5 dBm

15 W / 41.8 dBm

900 HP

60 W / 47.8 dBm

25 W / 44 dBm

1800 MP

35 W / 45.4 dBm

12 W / 40.8 dBm

1800 HP

60 W / 47.8 dBm

25 W / 44 dBm

900 EDGE+

45 W / 46.5 dBm

30 W / 44.8 dBm

1800 EDGE+

35 W / 45.4 dBm

30W / 44.8 dBm

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 G3 TREs are not able to handle the 8-PSK modulation. Only G4 TREs (also called TRA) are EDGE capable.


The TRA sensitivity is as follows :

GMSK : - 111 dBm.

8-PSK : - 108 dBm for MCS5, - 99 dBm for MCS9.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 25

1 Basics

1.11 8-PSK TRA Power Aspects [cont.]


1 1 26

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS


OUTPUT PWR
@ BTS ant.
connector

 Unbalanced BTS configuration


-8PSK
= APD

-8PSK
= APD

APD = 0

Case 1: BS_TXPWR_MAX=0
Case 2: BS_TXPWR_MAX<>0

 APD, takes into account the

SECTOR
GMSK

BS_TXPWR_MAX and consequently the


Effective GMSK Sector Power

8-PSK TRE 1

Always 8 PSK pwr GMSK pwr


 APD = 0 if 8 PSK pwr > GMSK pwr
 Used by Link Adaptation process


8-PSK TRE 2

HP TRE 1

LEGEND

MP TRE 1

Case 1

GMSK LEVELING

ATTENUATION
BS_TXPWR_MAX

8-PSK POWER

APD

GMSK POWER

HP TRE 1

MP TRE 2

Case 2

 8-PSK Delta power ( 8-PSK) considers

only the GMSK sector power without the


BS_TXPWR_MAX


8-PSK 3 dB indicates that is a high


power TRE

8-PSK

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 APD: Average Power Decrease

The back-off between average GMSK and 8-PSK output power comes from physics since 8-PSK is a non
constant envelope modulation unlike GMSK.
As a consequence power amplifiers can not be used at their maximum power. This results in a
difference between mean output powers for GMSK and 8-PSK modulations.

 Output power handling

The BTS sets all the TRE which transmit GMSK output powers at the same level which is the minimum
value among the maximum TRE output power in a sector and in a given band.
On a TRE, the maximum GMSK output power is higher than the maximum 8-PSK output power.

An O&M parameter (BS_TXPWR_MAX) allows a static power reduction of the maximum GMSK output
power of the sector.
The TRE transmit power in 8-PSK shall not exceed the GMSK transmit power in the sector.

The BTS determines for each TRE, the difference between the 8-PSK output power of the TRE and the
GMSK output power of the sector (8-PSK delta power).

According to the 8-PSK delta power value, a TRE is called High Power or Medium Power.

When a GCH channel is activated, the BTS sends the 8-PSK delta power to the MFS.
Together with BS_TXPWR_MAX (static power reduction), the 8-PSK delta power allows the MFS to
determine:

- a possible attenuation (BS_TX_PWR) for the 8-PSK DL RLC block emission, in order not to exceed
the GMSK power of the sector (for GMSK DL RLC block, the attenuation is BS_TXPWR_MAX).

- an Average Power Decrease which is the difference between the 8-PSK output power and the GMSK
output power after having taken into account BS_TXPWR_MAX. The Average Power Decrease is
taken into account in the link adaptation tables.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 26

1 Basics

1.11 8-PSK TRA Power Aspects [cont.]


1 1 27

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Example:

 GSM 900, a mix BTS sector configuration is considered:




ANc combined with 4 TRA (TRAs = EGPRS capable TRE):






TRE 1 (BCCH): 60W GMSK (25W in 8-PSK)


TRE 2..4: 45W GMSK (15W in 8-PSK)
BS_TXPWR_MAX = 2 dB;

 RESULTS:

 1st step: Output power at BTS antenna connector (after combiner and

duplexer stage):

TRE 1 GMSK = 43.4 dBm; 8-PSK = 39.6 dBm


 TRE 2..4 GMSK = 42.1 dBm; 8-PSK = 37.4 dBm


 2nd step: LEVELING (BTS automatic GMSK power balancing):




TRE 1..4 GMSK = 42.1 dBm (Sector GMSK power)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 27

1 Basics

1.11 8-PSK TRA Power Aspects [cont.]


1 1 28

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 3rd step: 8-PSK Delta computation

TRE 1 = 42.1 39.6 = 2.5 dBm < 3 dBm  recognized as HP TRE


 TRE 2..4 = 42.1 37.4 = 4.7 dBm  recognized as MP TREs


 4th step: static attenuation (only on GMSK power)




TRE 1..4 GMSK = 42.1 2 = 40.1 dBm (Effective GMSK Sector Power)

YES, since 40.1 dBm 39.6 dBm 37.4 dBm  no reduction of 8-PSK power

5th

step: GMSK power 8-PSK power ?

 6th step: APD computation

APD TRE 1 (BCCH) = 40.1 39.6 = 0.5 dBm


 APD TRE 2..4 = 40.1 37.4 = 2.7 dBm


3GPP 05.08 constraint on the transmitted power of BCCH frequency:


BCCH frequency shall usually be transmitted at a constant level. A tolerance has been
introduced with 8-PSK: a fluctuation of up to 2 dB is allowed
 If APD is greater than 2 dB, a static power attenuation should be applied or EGPRS
capability should not be activated on the BCCH TRE

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 Radio Network Planning Impact

Frequency hopping is not recommended for E-GPRS (MCS-1 to MCS-9)

Therefore, the system is allocating a higher priority for the packet-switched traffic for non-hopping
TRX in a cell.

In addition, the non-hopping TRX may benefit from a special radio planning with higher reuse cluster
size, in order to ensure higher C/I conditions and offer better throughputs, both for GPRS and EDGE.
APD should be considered in the A9155 planning tool for the throughput estimation (based on
interference calculation per pixel approach) and also to determine the 8-PSK coverage.

The IR gain should also be considered in the throughput estimation. 3 dB can be taken for the average
IR gain.

PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX is a flag at cell level which indicates whether the operator wishes to allocate
packet on the BCCH TRX with highest priority. Actually, is recommended to activate GPRS/EDGE
traffic on the BCCH TRX due to its high RCS. However the activation of EDGE on the BCCH TRX should
be performed cautiously.

3GPP Rec. 05.08 has defined a constraint on the transmitted power of BCCH frequency. This
frequency shall usually be transmitted at a constant level. A tolerance has been introduced with 8PSK: a fluctuation of up to 2 dB is allowed. Depending on the configuration in the BTS, it may happen
that the difference between GMSK and 8-PSK power on the BCCH TRX is greater than 2dB. A possible
solution for this constraint, in case of a BTS (e.g. ANc combined) equipped only with MP TRX (most of
the cases) is presented below: The BCCH MP TRX will be replaced by a HP TRX (to take also
advantage from 8-PSK 25W power and <3dB) BS_TXPWR_MAX will be set to 2 dB The difference
between GMSK and 8-PSK power on BCCH TRX will be: (42.1 2) 39.6 = 0.5 dB which respects the
ETSI constraint. The drawback is that CS and GPRS service may be affected by the GMSK output
power reduction.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 28

1 Basics

1.12 (E)GPRS Radio Blocks Structure


1 1 29

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 In order to be transmitted over the air interface, the LLC data is

segmented at RLC layer into packets, called (E)GPRS radio blocks


 Radio block characteristics:
 a block is the smallest data unit assigned to an user

 one radio block is always entirely assigned to one user; inside a block

there is no multiplexing of different users possible


 the whole information belonging to one radio block is transmitted upon
channel coding, in a certain timeslot over 4 consecutive TDMA frames
 the data amount carried in one (E)GPRS radio block is:




456 bits in GPRS (GMSK modulation)


464 bits in EGPRS (GMSK modulation)
1392 bits in EGPRS (8-PSK modulation)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 29

1 Basics

1.12 (E)GPRS Radio Blocks Structure [cont.]


1 1 30

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 GPRS Radio Block (data transfer)


MAC header





RLC data block

RLC header

BCS

MAC header: control fields which are different for uplink and downlink directions
RLC header: control fields which are different for uplink and downlink directions
RLC Data Block: bytes from one or more LLC PDUs
Block Check Sequence (BCS): used for error detection

 EGPRS Radio Block (data transfer)


RLC/MAC header





HCS RLC data block 1

RLC data block 2


only MCS-7/8/9

BCS

RLC/MAC header: control fields which are different for uplink and downlink directions
RLC Data Field: LLC PDUs bytes; contains one or two RLC data blocks
Block Check Sequence (BCS): for error detection of the data part
Header Check Sequence (HCS): for error detection of the header part

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 30

1 Basics

1.13 GPRS Channel Coding


1 1 31

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Channel coding provides error detection and error correction


 Essential for managing the impairments on the air interface

 Data rates in GPRS on the air interface

 The useful data rates on the air interface depend on the channel coding

procedure
 For (E)GPRS, different channel coding levels are applied depending on
the actual radio conditions

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 31

1 Basics

1.13 GPRS Channel Coding [cont.]


1 1 32

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Four different coding schemes, CS-1 to CS-4, are defined for the






GPRS Radio Blocks carrying RLC data, and are applied depending
from the actual radio conditions
The first step of the channel coding procedure is to add a Block
Check Sequence (BCS) for error detection
For CS-1 to CS-3, the second step consists of pre-coding USF
(except for CS-1), adding four tail bits and a half rate
convolutional coding for error correction that is punctured to give
the desired coding rate
For CS-4 there is no coding for error correction
The most protected mode is CS-1 which is therefore always used for
GPRS signaling (even for EGPRS)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 32

1 Basics

1.13 GPRS Channel Coding [cont.]


1 1 33

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS


GPRS RADIO BLOCK
USF

BCS

CS-1

rate 1/2 convolutional coding

GMSK
modulation

20
Maximum User Payload [kbps]

456 bits

Header + Protection

Interleaving of GPRS Radio Block over 4


consecutive TDMAs (4 PDCH)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

CS-3

14.4

puncturing

Release B8

CS-2

12

Scheme

Modulation
schemes

Coding schemes
for RLC data block

Code
rate

Maximum data rate


per TS (RLC payload)
[kbps]

CS-4
CS-3

GMSK

No coding

1.00

20.0

GMSK

Half rate convolutional


coding, punctured

0.75

14.4

CS-2

GMSK

Half rate convolutional


coding, punctured

0.66

12.0

CS-1

GMSK

Half rate convolutional


coding

0.50

8.0

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 33

CS-4

1 Basics

1.14 EGPRS Channel Coding


1 1 34

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Nine different coding schemes are defined: MCS-1 to MCS-9

 First step of the EGPRS coding procedure, is to add a Block Check

Sequence (BCS) to each RLC data block, for error detection


 Second step consists of adding six tail bits (TB) and a 1/3 rate
convolutional coding for error correction that is punctured to give
the desired coding rate
 The Pi (puncturing schemes) for each MCS correspond to different
puncturing schemes achieving the same coding rate
Puncturing is a technique of removing bits in predetermined locations of the
data block after the block has been channel coded
 MCS-9, MCS-8, MCS-7, MCS-4, MCS-3: are possible P1, P2, and P3
 MCS-6, MCS-5, MCS-2, MCS-1: P1 and P2 are possible


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

The puncturing process consists of transmitting only some of the coded bits obtained after the rate 1/3
convolutional coding. Depending on the considered puncturing scheme, different coded bits are transmitted.
Therefore, when the receiver receives two versions of the same RLC block sent with two different puncturing
schemes, it obtains additional information leading to an increased decoding probability.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 34

1 Basics

1.14 EGPRS Channel Coding [cont.]


1 1 35

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 MCSs are divided into 4 different families: A, A, B and C


 Each family has a different basic payload unit:
37
 34
 28
 22


bytes:
bytes:
bytes:
bytes:

family
family
family
family

A
A (padding)
B
C

 When switching to MCS-3 or MCS-6 from MCS-8, 3 or 6 padding bytes, are

added to the data bytes

 Within a family different throughputs are achieved by transmitting a


different number of basic payload units within one block
 impact on retransmission


Offset the GPRS disadvantage on retransmission

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 35

1 Basics

1.14 EGPRS Channel Coding [cont.]


1 1 36

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

GMSK

8.8

MCS-1

11.2

MCS-2

14.8

Family A

MCS-6

MCS-4
MCS-5

14.8 x 2 = 29.6

37 octets

MCS-9

Family A

34 +3 octets 34 +3 octets

padding

MCS-6
34 octets

34 octets

11.2 x 4 = 44.8

MCS-7
MCS-8

14.8 x 4 = 59.2

34 octets

MCS-2

Family B

MCS-9

Maximum User Payload [kbit/s]

34 octets

MCS-8

MCS-6

padding (MCS-3/6) 54.4

Family C

Header + Protection

37 octets

MCS-3

11.2 x 2 = 22.4

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

37 octets

37 octets

MCS-3

8.8 x 2 = 17.6

8-PSK

MCS-3

28 octets

28 octets

MCS-5

28 octets

28 octets

MCS-7

MCS-1
22 octets

22 octets

MCS-4

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

The main GPRS imperfections are linked to:

the design of the GPRS coding schemes which were designed independently from the others with
their own data unit.
the fact that once the information contained in an radio block has been transmitted with a
certain CS, it is not possible via the Automatic ReQuest for repetition (ARQ) mechanism to
retransmit with another CS.

- This could lead to the release of the TBF and to the establishment of a new one in order to
transmit the LLC frame.

 EGPRS coding schemes have been designed to offset this problem. Four MCS families have been

created with for each of them a basic unit of payload.

This allows the re-segmentation of the RLC data blocks when changing of modulation and coding
schemes (within the same family).
- Example: if one MCS-6 radio block has not been received correctly by the receiver and if
radio conditions have degraded in the meantime, it is possible to re-send the same
information in two radio blocks with MCS-3 (more protection).

The level of protection applied (MCS usage) in case of retransmissions is in line with the radio
conditions.
 The different code rates within a family are achieved by transmitting a different number of payload

units within one radio block. When 4 payload units are transmitted, these are split into 2 separate RLC
blocks (i.e., with separate sequence numbers).

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 36

1 Basics

1.14 EGPRS Channel Coding [cont.]


1 1 37

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 MCS-9 Example:
3 bits

EGPRS MCS-9 RADIO BLOCK

45 bits
RLC/MAC
header

USF

36 bits

612 bits

HCS E

FBI

RLC Data Block


= 592 bits

135 bits

36 bits

124 bits

BCS

TB

Rate 1/3 convolutional coding

P1

612 bits

P2

puncturing
612 bits

P3

612 bits

P1

1392 bits

Interleaving of the EGPRS Radio Block over 4 consecutive TDMAs

MCS-9 basic payload unit = 37 bytes = 296 bits


MCS-9 RLC data block = 2 x basic payload unit =2* 296 bits = 592 bits

MCS-9 RLC payload throughput= 592 bits / 10 ms = 59.2 Kbps


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning

TB

1836 bits

puncturing
612 bits

BCS

Rate 1/3 convolutional coding

1836 bits

puncturing
SB=8

612 bits

RLC Data Block =


FBI
592 bits

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 37

612 bits

P2

612 bits

P3

1 Basics

1.14 EGPRS Channel Coding [cont.]


1 1 38

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

Uplink
transfer

Scheme

Modulation
schemes

Coding schemes
for RLC data block

Code
rate

Maximum data rate per TS (RLC


payload)
[kbps]

MCS-9

8PSK

1/3 rate convolutional


coding, punctured

1.00

59.2

MCS-8

8PSK

1/3 rate convolutional


coding, punctured

0.92

54.4

MCS-7

8PSK

1/3 rate convolutional


coding, punctured

0.76

44.8

MCS-6

8PSK

1/3 rate convolutional


coding, punctured

0.49

29.6

MCS-5

8PSK

1/3 rate convolutional


coding, punctured

0.37

22.4

MCS-4

GMSK

1/3 rate convolutional


coding, punctured

1.00

17.6

MCS-3

GMSK

1/3 rate convolutional


coding, punctured

0.80

14.8

MCS-2

GMSK

1/3 rate convolutional


coding, punctured

0.66

11.2

MCS-1

GMSK

1/3 rate convolutional


coding, punctured

0.53

8.8

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 38

1 Basics

1.15 Radio Link Adaptation Overview


1 1 39

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 (M)CS schemes are dynamically selected based on the quality of the

radio channel, in order to maximize the throughput


 Two different mechanisms exists for GPRS and EGPRS:
 CS Adaptation in case of GPRS TBF mode and
 Link Adaptation (LA) in case of EGPRS TBF mode
 Selection of the most suitable (M)CS is based on measurements
reported by the MS for the downlink path and by the BTS for the
uplink path

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 39

1 Basics

1.16 Automatic ReQuest for repetition (ARQ)


1 1 40

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 In the ARQ method, when the receiver detects the presence of

errors in a received RLC block, it requests and receives a retransmission of the same RLC block from the transmitter
 The retransmission can be performed using:

 Type-I ARQ mechanism. This applies for both GPRS and EGPRS mode

 Type-II hybrid ARQ mechanism, also called Incremental Redundancy (IR).

This applies only for DL EGPRS mode

 IR is optional for the BTS, but is mandatory for the EGPRS MS (3GPP

requirement)

B9
!!! ARQ type-II applies for UL and DL EGPRS mode !!!

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 40

1 Basics

1.17 Type-I ARQ mechanism


1 1 41

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 In the selective type-I ARQ mechanism, the receiver discards the

erroneous blocks, and indicates in the acknowledgement messages


the reference of these erroneous blocks for their retransmission.
Then, the sending side has to retransmit the erroneous data RLC
blocks
MS

MFS
Uplink RLC data block B1 / PDTCH (1)
Uplink RLC data block B2 / PDTCH (2)

Packet UplinkAck/Nack /PACCH (3)


Uplink RLC data block B2 / PDTCH (4)
Uplink RLC data block B3 / PDTCH (5)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

The Block 2 has been


unsuccessfully received
MS retransmits the uplink
RLC data block B2

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 With the type 1 ARQ mechanism, the decoding of a re-transmitted RLC block does not use the

previously transmitted versions (not correctly received) of this RLC block. The decoding of a RLC data
block is only based on the current transmission.

 The type 1 ARQ mechanism is always used for the GPRS

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 41

1 Basics

1.18 Type-I ARQ in GPRS


1 1 42

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 GPRS CSs are designed independently from the others with its own basic

GPRS DRAWBACK

payload unit size, so the family concept does not exists in GPRS
 Before its transmission over the radio interface, the LLC frame is segmented
into payload units according to CS that will be used to transmit the radio
block
 In case of erroneous reception, the RLC data block can be retransmitted
only with the same CS (segmentation is not possible)
 If the radio conditions have changed and the coding rate is not appropriate to
them, the receiver will never be able to decode the retransmission of the RLC
data block. This will lead to the release of the TBF and the establishment of a
new one in order to transmit the LLC frame
 In order to avoid this problem, the choice of the CS on the network side has to
be made carefully. This often results in an non-optimized use of the radio
interface, leading to a reduction of network capacity compared with its
theoretical capacity

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 42

1 Basics

1.19 Type-I ARQ in EGPRS


1 1 43

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 MCSs have been designed to offset the GPRS disadvantage


 MCS family concept is applied

 In EGPRS, in case of retransmission request (type-I ARQ) for a RLC data

block, the same or a next lower MCS within the same family is used

 The retransmission can be performed with or w/o RLC data segmentation (e.g.

from MCS-9 to MCS-6 w/o, and MCS-6 to MCS-3 with segmentation)


 When one RLC data block is retransmitted with a lower MCS, the coding rate is
decreased by two, but the redundancy transmitted is increased
 That increases the capability to decode the radio block !

 Retransmission operates in connection with the link adaptation

 E.g. if the LA mechanism orders the usage of MCS-5 and the first transmission of

an erroneous RLC block was with MCS-6, the transmission will be performed with
MCS-3. The blocks that are sent for the first time will be transmitted with the
last-ordered MCS

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 43

1 Basics

1.19 Type-I ARQ in EGPRS [cont.]


1 1 44

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Type-II ARQ (IR) is an efficient combination of 2 techniques:

 Automatic Repeat reQuest : in case of error detection in a received RLC block, a

re-transmission of the same RLC data block is requested


 Forward Error Correction : adds redundant information to the user information at
the transmitter, the receiver uses the info to correct errors causes by radio
disturbances

 In the IR mechanism:

 The information which is sent first results from an initial puncturing scheme

(PS1) applied to the encoded RLC data block


 If an error is detected by the receiver:






the received message is stored


selective retransmission of the RLC data block is requested
a second puncturing scheme (PS2) is applied to the same MCS, by the sender
the receiver decodes (combines) the resulting message together with the previously
received message(s)
multiple retransmission can be requested until decoding succeeds

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 The type 2 ARQ mechanism or incremental redundancy (IR) is an ETSI function, mandatory for the EGPRS MS

receiver (downlink path) and optional for the BTS receiver (uplink path). In B8 release, the IR feature is only
available on the downlink path. It is important to notice that the IR feature is always running in the EDGE MS
receiver (except in case of MS memory shortage). The DL incremental redundancy is not used for the signaling
blocks, the GPRS data blocks and the data blocks in RLC unacknowledged mode. It is only used for the EGPRS data
blocks in RLC acknowledged mode.

 In the type II ARQ mechanism (IR):

the first emission of a RLC data block is done using a first puncturing scheme (PS1),

in case of re-transmission of this RLC block, the transmitter uses the same MCS or a MCS of the same family
than the one used for the initial block. On the DL path, depending on the value of the parameter
EN_FULL_IR_DL, re-segmentation of the RLC block may be performed or not,

at the output of the demodulator, the receiver combines the information of soft bits corresponding to the
first transmission of the block and its different re-transmissions, thus increasing the decoding probability of
the RLC block.
Remark : according to the 04.60 (RLC/MAC layers) GSM recommendation, the soft-combining inside the MS
receiver is only performed between an :
- MCSx block and MCSx block (that is the same MCS is used for the re-transmission),

- MCS9 block and an MCS6 block (in that case the RLC data blocks carry the same number of payload
units),
- MCS7 block and an MCS5 block (in that case the RLC data blocks carry the same number of payload
units).

 If the "MS OUT OF MEMORY" field is set by the mobile in the EGPRS Packet DL Ack/Nack message, the type I ARQ

shall apply in the MS receiver (ARQ without IR). This occurs when the memory for IR operation runs out in the MS
(that is when the memory of the MS is full due to the storage of the different versions of a RLC block not
correctly decoded).

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 44

1 Basics

1.19 Type-I ARQ in EGPRS [cont.]


1 1 45

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

(1) The BSS sends a DL data block


using the puncturing scheme P1 and
MCS-6. B1 is not successfully
decoded by the MS. The MS stores
the received block
(2) The MS requests a selective
retransmission of the erroneous
block, in the next EGPRS Packet DL
Ack/Nack
(3) The MS retransmits the DL data
block using a new puncturing
scheme P2 and the same MCS-6.
If the block header is correctly
decoded, the MS decodes the data
making soft combination with the
previous transmission

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

MS

BTS

MFS
Data Block

Data Block

puncturing
scheme 1
Nack

Data Block
Data Block

puncturing
scheme 2

Data Block

Data Block

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 In the puncturing scheme selection for re-transmission, 2 cases have to be considered:

if the selected MCS has not changed : if all the different punctured versions of the data block have
been sent, the procedure shall start over and PS1 shall be used, followed by PS2, then by PS3 (if
available for the considered MCS), so that the PS selection is cyclic,

if the selected MCS has changed : the PS to be used is indicated by the table below.

Previous MCS
MCS9

New MCS
MCS6

Previous PS

New PS

PS2

PS2

PS1 or PS3

PS1

MCS6

MCS9

PS1

PS3

MCS7

MCS5

PS1, PS2 or PS3

PS1

MCS5

MCS7

All other combinations

PS2

PS1 or PS2
Any

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 45

PS2

PS2

PS1

1 Basics

1.19 Type-I ARQ in EGPRS [cont.]


1 1 46

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 B9 release: the IR mechanism is implemented in uplink and

downlink
 This mechanism is associated with link adaptation in order to
provide superior radio efficiency on the air interface
 IR feature is always running in the EGPRS MS receivers, except when
a memory shortage is reported by the MS  the stored packets are
discarded and type-I ARQ is set !
 Parameter for IR activation:
 EN_FULL_IR_DL which enable or disable the RLC data segmentation for

retransmissions

EN_FULL_IR_DL = disable; e.g. if MCS-5 is ordered by LA, and the first


transmission was with MCS-6 then, the retransmission is performed with MCS-3
(segmentation on the initial RLC data block, ARQ Type-I)
 EN_FULL_IR_DL=enable; even if MCS-5 is ordered, the retransmission is
performed with MCS-6 (no segmentation, ARQ Type-II)


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 46

1 Basics

1.20 (E)GPRS radio physical channel: PDCH Concept


1 1 47

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Packet Data Channel (PDCH)

 (E)GPRS radio access method = GSM TDMA (8 timeslots per carrier)

 One PDCH represents a physical channel (1 timeslot) dedicated to packet

data traffic (GPRS/EDGE), over the radio interface

 PDCH group

 The available PDCHs are grouped into PDCH groups

 One PDCH group contains consecutive timeslots (without TS holes)

belonging to the same TRX, having the same radio configuration




possible to have hopping and non hopping PDCH groups in one cell

 maximum number of PDCH groups/cell is equal to 16 (equal to maximum

number of TRX / cell)




16 TRX/cell achieved with help of the B7 feature cell split over 2 BTSs, EVOLIUM BTS

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 47

1 Basics

1.21 (E)GPRS Multiframe


1 1 48

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 12 radio blocks (B0 to B11) form a 52-(E)GPRS multiframe

 The frames 25 and 51 are idle frames and the frames 12 and 38 are

used for the PTCCH

One TDMA frame


= 8 TS (4,615 ms)
0

One PDCH

Block B0

Block B1

10

Block B2

11

12

13

PTCCH

14

Block B3

One 52 - multiframe (240 ms)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

15

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 48

16

47

48

49

Block B11

50

51

idle

1 Basics

1.22 (E)GPRS Logical Channels


1 1 49

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 EGPRS is reusing the existing GPRS logical channels

 Packet logical channels are mapped in one physical channel (PDCH)

using the technique of multiframing

 The sharing of the PDCH is done on blocks basis

 PBCCH (Packet Broadcast Control Channel) used for broadcasting

system information (SI)


 PCCCH (Packet Common Control Channel) used to initiate packet
transfer
 PRACH (Packet Random Access Channel)
 PPCH (Packet Paging Channel)

 PAGCH (Packet Access Grant Channel)

!!! MASTER CHANNEL ONLY !!!

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 49

1 Basics

1.22 (E)GPRS Logical Channels [cont.]


1 1 50

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 PTCH (Packet Traffic Channel) used for user data transmission and

its associated signaling

 PDTCH (Packet Data Traffic Channel) used to carry user data (LLC PDU

segmented is RLC/MAC blocks)

 PACCH (Packet Associated Control Channel)

Bidirectional channel, dynamically allocated on block basis, used to carry


control data
 In Alcatel BSS is always allocated on one of the PDCHs on which PDTCHs are
allocated


 PTCCH (Packet Timing Advance Control Channel) used for

continuous timing advance mechanism




Bidirectional channel allocated on the same PDCH as the PACCH

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 50

1 Basics

1.23 Master/Slave PDCH concept


1 1 51

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 A PDCH which carries a PCCCH or/and a PBCCH channel is called

Master PDCH (MPDCH)

 MPDCH which carries the PBCCH is called Primary MPDCH




Primary MPDCH is the GPRS BCCH

 MPDCH which carries only PCCCH is called Secondary MPCH

 All other PDCHs, active as slaves, are called Slave PDCH (SPDCH)
 B8 release:

 MPDCHs are statically established only on BCCH TRX

 Up to 4 MPDCHs can be supported per cell (max Nb_TS_MPDCH=4)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 51

1 Basics

1.24 Temporary Block Flow


1 1 52

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The packet data call is a Temporary Block Flow (TBF)

 For a data packet transmission, a temporary physical connection (TBF)







will be set up as an unidirectional link


Each TBF is unidirectional: Uplink TBF and Downlink TBF for the same
mobile are uncorrelated
One TBF allocates radio resources on one or more PDCH and comprise a
number of RLC/MAC blocks carrying one or more LLC PDUs
TBF is only temporary and maintained for the duration of the data
transfer
Either the mobile or the network can initiate a TBF

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 Temporary Flow Identity (TFI):

Each TBF is assigned a TFI by the MFS.

 Important:

Since B7, it is possible to establish 32 TBFs per PDCH group (See sub-session 2.2 for PDCH group
definition).

 TBF

is a group of blocks dynamically allocated to one MS for one transfer of RLC blocks in one direction
inside one cell.

A Temporary Block Flow is a temporary, unidirectional physical connection across the Um interface,
between one mobile and the BSS. The TBF is established when data units are to be transmitted across
the Um interface and is released as soon as the transmission is completed.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 52

1 Basics

1.24 Temporary Block Flow [cont.]


1 1 53

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 TFI (Temporary Flow Identity)


 RLC layer

 Each TBF is assigned a TFI by the MFS

 TFI is unique on a given PDCH, in a given direction

 A TBF is addressed by a Temporary Flow Identity (TFI)

 More than 32 TFI values per TRX (PDCH group) for each direction (i.e. DL

and UL)

 TLLI (Temporary Logical Link Identity)


 LLC layer

 The TLLI identifies the logical link between the MS and the SGSN

 The TLLI is allocated by the SGSN to the MS in Standby and Ready states

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 53

1 Basics

1.25 Resources Sharing


1 1 54

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Two different resource sharing mechanisms exists:


 PDCH multiplexing
 Multislot usage

Allows optimum usage of the available radio resources

 PDCH Multiplexing

 PDCH multiplexing refers to the sharing of one PDCH by more than two users

(TBFs)
 It occurs when there are more requests for PDCH resources than available PDCHs
 A maximum number of UL/DL_TBF can share the same PDCH in UL and DL
direction respectively


MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH=6; MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH=10

 When a PDCH is shared between an UL GPRS TBF and a DL EGPRS TBF, then the DL

EGPRS shall be limited to GMSK (i.e. MCS-4)  GPRS MS becomes candidate for
radio resource reallocation

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 54

1 Basics

1.25 Resources Sharing [cont.]


1 1 55

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Multislot usage

 Refers to the case when 1 user can request at once more than 2 PDCH

resources for the data transmission

 Up to 5 PDCH on different (but consecutive) timeslots on the same

frequency could be allocated to one mobile at the same time (MS


multislot capability)


B8 & B9 release supports 4+2 slots for Type 1 MS and 5+5 for Type 2 MS

 The PDCH blocks will be consecutively transmitted over the PDCH

only if there is no user multiplexing

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 55

1 Basics

1.25 Resources Sharing [cont.]


1 1 56

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 PDCH Multiplexing example:

 lets assume that the data for user 1 has a length of 3 blocks (length of

TBF 1=3 blocks) and is transmitted over PDCH #2


 as soon as one block of user 1 was entirely transmitted, another user 2
can use the same PDCH #2 to transmit the blocks of its own TBF of e.g.
length = 4 blocks, followed by the user 3 transmission...
 the blocks of user 1, user 2 and user 3 will not be transmitted in
consecutive order:


as soon as one block of user 1 is transmitted, another block of user 2 can be


transmitted, continued with a block of the user 3 over the same PDCH #2

 Multislot usage example:

 User 1 has (1+1) and users 2 & user 3 have (3+1) MS multislot capability

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 56

1 Basics

1.25 Resources Sharing [cont.]


1 1 57

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 PDCH Multiplexing and Multislot Usage example

User 1:
no multislot
capability
TFI = 5

User 2:
with multislot
capability
TFI = 9

Multislot capability

PDCH 1

User 2

User 2

User 3

User 3

User 2

User 2

User multiplexing

PDCH 2

User 1

User 2

User 3

User 1

User 2

User 2

User multiplexing
User 3:
with multislot
capability
TFI = 13

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

PDCH 3
Block

User 3

User 2

User 3

User 3

User 2

User 3

n+1

n+2

n+3

n+4

n+5

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 57

...

1 Basics

1.26 MS multiplexing co-ordination


1 1 58

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 DL TBF (PDTCH and PACCH)

 MS decodes all blocks on its allocated PDCH

 The MS can identify the PDCH blocks intended for it by TFI present on

the RLC block header

 UL TBF (PDTCH and PACCH)

 For an UL TBF, the mobile receives one USF (Uplink State Flag) per

PDCH to be used during the TBF


 If the MS receives its USF on the DL block n of PDCH 5, it can transmit in
UL using the block n+1 of PDCH 5

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 Downlink PDTCH and PACCH blocks multiplexing:

The multiplexing of the different MSs is performed thanks to the TFI which is present in the RLC
block header.

An MS decodes all the blocks of all its allocated PDCHs and keeps the blocks carrying its TFI in the
RLC header.
 Uplink PDTCH and PACCH for a UL TBF:

At UL TBF establishment, a MS receives a USF (Uplink State Flag, 8 values, MAC header) per allocated
PDCH.

If the MS receives its USF on the downlink block n of PDCH I, it can transmit in uplink using the block
n+1 of PDCH i.
 NB: the values of the USF are entirely dedicated to PDTCH and PACCH transfers. See further (MPDCH

and RRBP) The TFI is use in the UL as well: each mobile shall put its TFI in the UL header of the UL
blocks during a UL TBF, as well as in the RLC header of the UL PACCH blocks of a DL TBF. So we can say
that the de-multiplexing of the blocks is achieved by the use of a TFI.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 58

1 Basics

1.26 MS multiplexing co-ordination [cont.]


1 1 59

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Uplink PACCH for a DL TBF :

 By the means of the polling mechanism, periodically an UL PACCH block

is allocated during DL transfer, e.g. to allow an MS to request the


establishment of an UL TBF by including a Channel Request description in
a Packet DL Ack/Nack message
 the MS has no USF because it is involved in a DL TBF
 use of the RRBP (Relative Reserved Block Period) field transmitted in
downlink


RRBP values indicates the number of TDMA frames the MS shall wait before
transmitting its uplink RLC/MAC block

 a special USF value is used: USF = no emission

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 RRBP: Relative Radio Block Period


 Allocation of a PACCH block for the sending of acknowledgements in the UL of blocks received in the

DL:

The MS has no USF because it is involved in a DL TBF

Use of the RRBP field transmitted in the downlink (MAC header) in association with the TFI of the DL
TBF in the RLC header.
At the exact occurrence of the RRBP, a special USF value is used for the UL TBF taking place on the
same PDCH: USF=no emission.

 It is a semi-boolean parameter. The RRBP field of a RLC/LAC block is checked each time by the MS

whose TFI is written in the RLC header.

When S/P is false, no UL PACCH is scheduled.

When the RRBP field is valid, the value gives the number of blocks to wait before sending its PACCH
block in the UL
 S/P is false means MS has to send an acknowledgement message to the MFS.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 59

1 Basics

1.26 MS multiplexing co-ordination [cont.]


1 1 60

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Example of a Uplink Block Flow scheduling:

Block
number
Bn
Bn+1
Bn+2
Bn+3
Bn+4
Bn+5
Bn+6

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

TFI
TFIa
TFIb
TFIa
TFIb
TFIb

Downlink
USF
RRBP

USFj
USFk
USFj
FREE
No
Emission
TFIb USFj
TFIa USFk

+3

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 60

Uplink

PDTCHj
PDTCHk
PDTCHj
PRACH
PACCHa
PDTCHj

1 Basics

1.27 GPRS mobility management (GMM) states for MS


1 1 61

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Idle

 the MS is not attached to the

Idle

packet network: paging is not


possible

GPRS
attach

 Ready

 the MS location is known with

the cell accuracy

 Standby

Timer
expiry

 the MS is attached to the

network: paging is possible


 the MS location is known with
the RA accuracy

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning




Timer
expiry

Standby

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

the MS is attached to the network: paging is possible.

the MS location is known in the CN with the RA accuracy.

Packet Idle Mode:

the MS location is known with the cell accuracy.

timer T_READY keeps the MS in the Ready state just after data transfer.
no Temporary Block Flow exists. Upper layers can require the transfer of an LLC PDU which, implicitly, may trigger the
establishment of TBF and transition to packet transfer mode.

the MS listens to the PBCCH and to the paging sub-channel for the paging group the MS belongs to in idle mode. If PCCCH is not
present in the cell, the mobile station listens to the BCCH and to the relevant paging sub-channels.

Packet Transfer Mode:

In packet transfer mode, the mobile station is allocated radio resource providing a Temporary Block Flow on one or more
physical channels. Continuous transfer of one or more LLC PDUs is possible. Concurrent TBFs may be established in opposite
directions. Transfer of LLC PDUs in RLC acknowledged or RLC unacknowledged mode is provided.

When selecting a new cell, mobile station leaves the packet transfer mode, enters the packet idle mode where it switches to
the new cell, read the system information and may then resume to packet transfer mode in the new cell.

The timers regulating the transition between states are SGSN timers, not tunable in the BSS. Caution: Idle mode in GPRS and Idle
mode in GSM are two different states.
A GSM MS in Idle mode is attached to a MSC and can be paged




PDU transmission

Standby:

Ready:

Ready

Idle: the MS is not attached to the network: paging is not possible.

GPRS
detach

A GPRS MS in Idle mode is NOT attached to a SGSN, so it cannot be paged but can monitor the GPRS information broadcast in
the SI13 of the BCCH.

Standby is the closest GPRS MS state to Idle GSM.

The MS state in the SGSN shall be considered apart from the Packet Transfer Mode in the BSS:
MS in Standby mode can be in Packet Transfer Mode.
MS in Ready mode can be in Packet Idle Mode.

The detach procedure is usually triggered by the MS. Three other types of detach are triggered by the CN:
HLR Detach,

SGSN Detach upon SGSN overload,


SGSN Detach upon timer.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 61

1 Basics

1.28 Radio Resource (RR) operating modes for MS


1 1 62

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Packet Transfer Mode (PTM)

 MS is allocated radio resource on one or more PDCHs for the transfer of

LLC PDUs. Continuous transfer of LLC PDUs is possible

 Packet Idle Mode (PIM)

 No TBF exists and the MS is also not trying to establish an UL TBF

 GMM states versus RR operating modes:

GMM States
GMM Ready
GMM Standby

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

RR Operating Modes
PTM: TBF opened

PIM: TBF closed but GMM ready timer is still running

PIM: There is no on-going TBF established and GMM ready


timer is no more running

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 62

1 Basics

1.29 Attach procedure


1 1 63

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Aim

 to access to GPRS services, a MS must first make its presence known to

the network by performing a GPRS attach to the SGSN

 GPRS attach function is similar to IMSI attach


 MS authentication

 Ciphering key generation

 TLLI allocation (derived from the new P-TMSI)


 Subscriber profile request to the HLR

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 63

1 Basics

1.29 Attach procedure [cont.]


1 1 64

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Results

 A logical link between the MS and the SGSN is created

 MS is in Standby state and may activate a PDP context


 MS location is known (RA accuracy)

 MS is available for paging via the SGSN


 Charging information is collected

 Combined GPRS and IMSI attach is possible for class A/B MS

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 64

1 Basics

1.30 PDP context activation


1 1 65

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Aim

 in order to send and receive GPRS data, the MS must activate the PDP

(Packet Data Protocol) address, which it wants to use

 Results

 the MS is known in the corresponding GGSN (the GGSN knows the SGSN

where the MS is located) and data transmission with external data


network can begin

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 65

1 Basics

1.31 Location management


1 1 66

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

MS enters in a new cell

New cell inside the current RA


MS in Ready state

Cell update

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

New cell belongs to a new RA

New cell belongs to a new LA

RA update

RA/LA update

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 When the MS is in Ready State, it performs a Cell Update.

The MS sends any LLC frame in the new cell with its TLLI in the header.

The Cell and RAC information is added by the BSSGP at the programming of the BSSGP frame
 RA Update:

The MS sends an RA Update Request message containing the identity of the MS, the old RAI and the
Update Type. The update type is either enter a new RA or periodical RA update.

The BSS adds the cell global Identity when transferring the message into a BSSGP frame towards the
SGSN.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 66

1 Basics

1.32 Routing Area


1 1 67

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 As total paging is more frequent with GPRS service together with

GSM paging, Routing Area (RA) was defined which may be smaller
than Location Area (LA)
 One RA is a subset of one and only one LA
 RAI (RA Identity) identifies several cells

 The MS location in Standby state is known in the SGSN at the RA level

 The MS is paged in its RA when MT traffic (MS in Standby State) arrives at

the SGSN
 One RA is served by only one SGSN

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 67

1 Basics

1.33 Network Mode of Operation (NMO)


1 1 68

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Paging Coordination

NMO

CS Paging
Channel

PS Paging
Channel

CCCH

CCCH

Packet data channel

(not applicable)

CCCH

PCCCH

CCCH

CCCH

II
III

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

PCCCH

CCCH

PCCCH

CCCH

Characteristics
- Gs interface
- MPDCH
- Gs interface
- no MPDCH
- Gs interface

- no Gs interface
- no MPDCH
- no Gs interface
- MPDCH

- no Gs interface
- no MPDCH

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 Since B7, all the possible combinations with the MPDCH are:

NMOIII,

NMOI with MPDCH.


 According to the NMO offered and the packet mode of the MS (Packet Transfer Mode or Packet Idle

Mode), the routing of the PS paging and the CS paging changes.

 The NMO setting is done from the OMC-R via the NETWORK_OPERATION_MODE parameter.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 68

1 Basics

1.34 TBF establishment


1 1 69

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Several modes of TBF establishment in UL and DL exists:


 In PIM mode
 UL TBF on the CCCH or PCCCH (with primary MPDCH activation)
 DL TBF on the CCCH or PCCCH (with primary MPDCH activation)

 In PTM mode
 UL TBF establishment during a DL TBF on the uplink PACCH
 DL TBF establishment during a UL TBF on the downlink PACCH
 The TBF establishment is performed through two types of access requests:
 One phase access request
 Two phase access request

 B8/B9: The BSS preferentially establishes an EGPRS TBF to an EGPRS MS

provided that an EGPRS Packet Channel request message has been


received and that there are EGRPS resources (i.e. radio resources supported
by an EGPRS capable TRX) available in the cell, otherwise a GPRS TBF will
be established

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 69

1 Basics

1.35 UL TBF establishment on CCCH, 1 phase access


1 1 70

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 MS is in PIM mode:
MS

The MS
switches
on the
assigned
PDCH

(EGPRS Packet) BTS


Channel request
TA calculation
RACH

BSC

Also PRACH

(E)GPRS mode
Immediate assignment
AGCH
Also PAGCH
Packet UL assignment
PACCH
Packet control Ack
PACCH

RLC data block (TLLI, TFI)


PDTCH
PACCH

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

MFS

Channel request + TA

Resource
1
Immediate assignment allocation
TFI, USF, TAI, TA

Packet UL assignment, polling


TFI, USF, TAI
Resource
activation
Packet UL Ack/Nack
TLLI, TFI

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 70

1 Basics

1.35 UL TBF establishment on CCCH, 1 phase access


1 1 71

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 1 allocation of only one PDCH because the multi slot capability of

the MS is not known

 Even if the Packet EGPRS Channel Request provides the MS multislot

class, only one PDCH is allocated

 2 sending of the Packet UL assignment in order to force the MS to

send an acknowledgement (polling mechanism)


 3 contention resolution mechanism :

 suppose two MS send a (EGPRS Packet) Channel Request at the same

time
 each MS sends its TLLI (and TFI)
 the TLLI is present in the acknowledgement from the MFS
 the MS with the wrong TLLI is discarded

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 71

1 Basics

1.36 UL TBF establishment on CCCH, 2 phases access


1 1 72

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 MS is in PIM mode:
MS

(EGPRS Packet) BTS


Channel request
TA calculation
RACH

BSC

Channel request + TA

Also PRACH

(E)GPRS mode
Immediate assignment
AGCH
Also PAGCH
Packet resource request
PACCH
The MS
switches
on the
assigned
PDCHs

Packet UL assignment
PACCH
Packet control Ack
PACCH
RLC data block
PDTCH

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

MFS

Immediate assignment
TBF starting time, TA Single block
allocation
Packet resource request
TLLI
Packet UL assignment, polling
TFI, USFs, TAI, TLLI
Packet control Ack

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 72

Resource
allocation

Resource
activation

1 Basics

1.36 UL TBF establishment on CCCH, 2 phases access [cont.]


1 1 73

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 2 phases access is necessary when the MS wants either to :


 Use RLC unacknowledged mode
 Give its multislot class

 Give QoS parameters (Peak_Throughput_Class, Radio_Priority)

 Main difference:

 Packet Resource Request message

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 73

1 Basics

1.37 DL TBF establishment on CCCH


1 1 74

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 MS is in PIM mode:
MS

1 PDCH
allocated
PDCH(s)
allocated

4 access bursts

BTS

Immediate assignment
PCH
Also PPCH
Packet DL assignment
PACCH

BSC

Resource
allocation
Immediate assignment
TFI, TAI

Packet DL assignment, polling


TFI, TAI

Packet control Ack TA calculation


Packet control Ack
PACCH
Timing Advance / Power control
TA / PC
PACCH
RLC data block
PDTCH

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

MFS

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 74

LLC PDU

1 Basics

1.38 System information broadcasting on BCCH


1 1 75

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The BCCH indicates if GPRS is supported in the cell:


 SI3/4: GPRS supported or not

SI13 position on BCCH used for GPRS


 SI3: RA_COLOUR (routing area color) field present if GPRS
supported

 If GPRS is supported :

 SI13 is broadcasted on the BCCH

 SI13 broadcast instead of retransmission of SI 1

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 Note: do not confuse RA_COLOUR and RA Code. The former is used as a flag which has two uses for the

MS entering a new cell:

to know if the GPRS service is supported in the cell (RA_COLOUR has a value different from -1).

to trigger an RA update when the value of the RA_COLOUR changes. It is easy to monitor because it is
broadcast often.
The Routing Area Code is necessary for the RA update procedure (message content).
The SI13 takes the place of a few SI1 occurrences.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 75

1 Basics

1.38 System information broadcasting on BCCH [cont.]


1 1 76

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 SI 13 content (non exhaustive):


 RAC: routing area code

 NMO: network mode of operation

 PAN_DEC, PAN_INC, PAN_MAX: radio link supervision


 ALPHA: GPRS uplink power control

 T_AVG_T, T_AVG_W: calculation of average levels

 PC_MEAS_CHAN: level measurements on BCCH/PDCH

 NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER: packet cell re-selection mode


EGPRS cell

 Access Burst Type : 8 bit or 11 bit access burst

 EGPRS_PACKET_CHANNEL_REQUEST: EGPRS capable MS shall use EGPRS

PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST message for uplink TBF establishment on the


(P)RACH (En_EGPRS = True)
 BEP_PERIOD: Bit error probability (BEP) filter averaging period

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 The MS has to get SI13 information on a regular basis:

each time the SI13 content is updated (PSI field = SI13_CHANGE_MARK set to 1).
every 30 seconds max (even if the TBF has to be interrupted).

Through 2 different ways: SI13 on the BCCH or PSI13 in a PACCH block.

The MS has always the time to switch on PSI13 in NMOIII and/or NMOI with a Master PDCH
because PBCCH blocks are always after a I or X TS within the 52 multi-frame.

 Access Burst Type: it defines the access burst (8 bits or 11 bits) to be used on the PRACH, PTCCH and

the Packet Control Ack on a PACCH.

 When the Master Channel is present in the cell, the System Information Type 13 message has different

contents from those described above. It mainly consists of:

The radio description of the Primary Master Channel (in terms of time slot number, training
sequence code and frequency parameters).

One GPRS Mobile Allocation (MA), if frequency hopping is used for GPRS. This is the GPRS MA of
the Primary Master Channel, if hopping. If the Primary Master Channel is not hopping, the MA
corresponds to the hopping TRX(s) used for GPRS, if any.

 Three modes of cell reselection have been defined by the 3GPP Standard for GPRS MSs. These

Network Control (NC) modes, known as the NC0, NC1 and NC2, are shortly described below:

NC0: the GPRS MS performs autonomous cell reselection without sending measurement reports to
the network.

NC1: the GPRS MS performs autonomous cell reselection. Additionally it sends measurement
reports to the network.

NC2: the GPRS MS shall not perform autonomous cell reselection. It sends measurement reports
to the network. The network controls the cell reselection.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 76

1 Basics

1.39 System information broadcasting on PBCCH


1 1 77

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Presence of a PBCCH (primary MPDCH) in the cell is indicated by a

PBCCH description in the SI13 message

 Primary MPDCH presence is possible only in NMO I or in NMO III

 Secondary MPDCHs presence are in indicated in PSI 2 message broadcast

on the PBCCH channel


 All (E)GPRS MS monitor the PBCCH to receive the PACKET SYSTEM
INFORMATION messages (PSI)

 Without PBCCH configured in the cell:


 In PIM, MS receive SI13 sent on BCCH

 In PTM, MS receive PSI 13 (=SI13) sent on PACCH

 Not possible to indicate to a MS, GPRS re-selection parameters (C31 and

C32 criteria)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 Cell Parameters

NMO, MS Timers, DRX info, RLS parameters, etc.

 PRACH access control parameters

access burst type, access control class, etc.

 PCCCH organization parameters

BS_PBCCH_BKLS, BS_PAGCH_BLKS_RES, BS_PRACH_BLKS

 The GPRS cell adjacencies are the same for a MS in Packet Idle Mode as for a MS in Packet Transfer

Mode. The GPRS cell adjacencies are equal to CS cell adjacencies.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 77

1 Basics

1.39 System information broadcasting on PBCCH [cont.]


1 1 78

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 PSI 1 (sent also periodically in PTM on PACCH)


 Cell and BSS parameters

 PRACH access control parameters

 Description of the configuration of the packet control channels




number of blocks per 52 multiframe

 Power control parameters

 PSI 2 (sent also periodically in PTM on PACCH)


 Cell allocation

 GPRS mobile allocation : HSN + list of frequencies

 PCCCH description : list of TS and frequency configuration


 Circuit-switched parameters

 Cell Identification : CI, RAC, LAC, MNC, MCC

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 PSI3, PSI3bis:

One PSI3 instance shall be sent and, as a minimum, one PSI3bis instance shall be sent as well

There may be up to 16 PSI3bis instances.

Reselection parameters: C31_HYST, C32_HYST, GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYST, PRIORITY_CLASS,


HCS_THR, RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS

Neighbor cell parameters: BSIC, BCCH frequency, SI13 PBCCH location, GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN,
GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH, GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET, GPRS_PENALTY_TIME,
GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET.
Up to 32 neighboring cells may be defined. The field Same_RA_As_Serving_Cell provides
complementary information for reselection process.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 78

1 Basics

1.39 System information broadcasting on PBCCH [cont.]


1 1 79

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 PSI 3 / 3bis

 BA(GPRS) list (identical to GSM BA list, neighboring cells BCCH)

 Cell selection and re-selection parameters for (non-)serving cells


 LSA identification of serving and neighboring cells

 PSI 8 CBCH information (TS, freq., if there is CBCH in the cell)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 79

1 Basics

1.40 (E)GPRS Transmission Aspects


Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

!!! MODIFIED FOR B9 !!!

1 1 80

 One Abis link is made of 31 64 kb/s timeslots

 A 16 kb/s transmission channel is called a nibble


 One timeslot is made of 4 nibbles

 A transmission channel established for carrying (E)GPRS traffic is called a

GCH (GPRS channel). One GCH uses one Abis nibble and one Ater nibble

 Two main types of Abis nibbles:


 Basic nibbles

Carry CS traffic
 Carry PS traffic but only coded with (M)CS-1 or (M)CS-2
 Located on Primary Abis


 Extra nibbles

Come from additional Abis timeslots for support of high speed packet traffic
 Carry PS traffic only
 Located on Primary or Secondary Abis


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 80

1 Basics

1.40 TRX Classes Concept


1 1 81

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 To support high data throughputs, Alcatel has developed a solution,

which aims at providing the best trade-off between offered radio


throughput and impact on the telecom resource consumption
 This solution is based on the concept of multiple classes of TRX,
which support more or less data throughput. The higher the packet
class, the higher the maximum data throughput, the higher the
impact on BSS Telecom resources
 Five TRX classes (1 to 5) have been defined
 The Operator defines per cell the number of TRXs of each class

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 81

1 Basics

1.40 TRX Classes Concept [cont.]


1 1 82

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

Supported (Modulation and) Coding schemes


TRX
Packet Class
Max 12 kbps
Max 22 kbps
Max 30 kbps
Max 54 kbps
Max 59 kbps

Class 1
Simple

Class 2
Double

GPRS CS 1,2,3,4
EDGE MCS 1,2,3,4,5,6

Class 5
Quintuple

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

GPRS CS 1,2
EDGE MCS 1,2

GPRS CS 1,2,3,4
EDGE MCS 1,2,3,4,5

Class 3
Triple
Class 4
Quad

G3 or G4 TRX

GPRS CS 1,2,3,4
EDGE MCS 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8

GPRS CS 1,2,3,4
EDGE MCS 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9

Abis TS per TRX


2
4
6
8
10

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 EGCH

An EGCH is made up of a pool of GCHs (from 1 to 5): One main GCH and a pool of auxiliary GCHs (the
GCH uses the basic 16k Abis nibble).

 TRX class

The TRX class is defined at MFS level. For a TRX class n, the MFS will use n GCHs to establish one
EGCH. The TRX class varies with the hardware TRX capabilities (TRX type, Hardware PS capability).
Higher the TRX class is, higher the PDCH throughput is.

 AterMux resources allocation

In case of EGCH establishment, from one to five AterMux nibbles will be necessary. Nibbles have not
to be contiguous.
These nibbles will be taken:

- on free nibbles of at least one already switched 64 Kbit/s channel, or,

- on free nibbles of one or more already switched 64 Kbit/s channels and on an additional 64 Kbit/s
channel, switched for this purpose, or,

- on 1 or 2 additional 64 Kbit/s channels, switched for this purpose.

When possible, the first possibility will be chosen.

When establishing a PDCH, the number of GCH links per radio time slot is determined according to
the TRX class, the PDCH type (SPDCH/MPDCH), and the AterMux congestion state.

 Abis Interface

Several Abis nibbles are also used to handle a throughput higher than 16Kbit/s. Abis configuration is
static due to hardware constraints.

Depending on the requested throughput, a radio time slot needs up to 4 extra Abis nibbles in addition
to the basic one.
As all radio time slots of a TRX must have the same throughput capability, a TRX needs up to 8 extra
Abis time slots. These extra Abis time slots are called a TRX transmission pool.
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 82

1 Basics

1.40 TRX Classes Concept [cont.]


1 1 83

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Example 1: TRX class 1, up to CS-2 / MCS-2


Abis

TRX
TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3 TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7

TS0

TS1

TS2

TS3

TS4

TS5

TS6

TS7

 Example 2: TRX class 4, up to CS-4 / MCS-8


TRX

Basic Nibble

Abis

TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3 TS4

TS5 TS6 TS7

Radio Timeslot

1 PDCH = 4 terrestrial nibbles


= 1 basic nibble also used for voice
+ 3 additional nibbles used only for
packet traffic
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning

TS0

TS1

TS2

TS3

TS4

TS5

TS6

TS7

TS0

TS1

TS2

TS3

TS4

TS5

TS6

TS7

TS0

TS1

TS2

TS3

TS4

TS5

TS6

TS7

TS0

TS1

TS2

TS3

TS4

TS5

TS6

TS7

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 83

Basic
Timeslots

Basic
Timeslots
6 Extra
Timeslots
Extra Nibbles

1 Basics

1.41 Two Abis Links per BTS


1 1 84

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The secondary Abis is fully dedicated to packet data


 Two topologies exists
BSC

Primary Abis

EVOLIUM
BTS

Secondary Abis
Primary Abis

BTS

BTS

Topology 1

EVOLIUM
BTS

Secondary Abis

Topology 2

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 84

1 1 85

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

2 B9 features

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 85

2 B9 features

2.1 Enhanced Packet Cell Reselection (R4 MSs)


Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 In B9 a number of procedures have been introduced to achieve

1 1 86

better performances for GPRS cell reselections:


 Packet PSI Status procedure


reducing the duration of the phase where the MS acquires PSI in the target cell

 Packet SI Status procedure, same scope as above for SI in the target cell
 Network Assisted Cell Change procedures


reducing, in NC0 and NC2 mode, the duration of the phase where the MS
acquires target cell (P)SI, in the serving cell

 CCN mode procedure (Cell Change Notification)




allowing, in NC0 mode, the MS to indicate its wish to perform a cell reselection

 Cell System Information distribution


 Cell ranking with load criteria

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 86

2 B9 features

2.1.1 Radio Network Impact


1 1 87

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The B9 added improvements allow reducing the time dedicated to a

Cell Reselection in packet mode.


 These sub-features impact traffic model, allowing faster CR to a
new cell or less number of CRs performed in a cell, will result in a
higher aggregated throughput in the cell.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 87

2 B9 features

2.2 Extended Uplink TBF Mode


1 1 88

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 This feature allows improving access time to the GPRS network


 ping test down to 350 ms

 It also improves the throughput in some cases.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 The feature main benefits are: reduced (may be 0) delay before next UL transmission (no new TBF to establish) and

reduced DL TBF establishment, when it follows an UL TBF. Expected effects:

In uplink, it can avoid to re-establish TBF for subsequent burst of data from the same higher layer transaction,
and it avoids to establish a new TBF if new data arrive during countdown procedure on the current TBF.
In uplink, it can avoid to re-establish TBF for subsequent burst of data from the same higher layer transaction,
and it avoids to establish a new TBF if new data arrive during countdown procedure on the current TBF.

in downlink, it allows to perform more often the TBF establishment on concurrent TBF and it saves the DL
bandwidth by sending dummy UI commands (on the DL TBF is in delayed release state) if a concurrent TBF exists.
Both effects are expected to improve the end-to-end transmission delay and consequently to reduce the transfer
duration.
 The mechanism proposed has the following characteristics:

Extended Uplink TBF shall be used whenever allowed by the MS capabilities.

The BSS shall be able to acquire the MS capability as fast as possible, using the Radio Access capability update
procedure (or information stored in other GPUs).

When the MS does not support the extended UL TBF mode , the BSS will use the normal release procedure, and
apply the delayed Final PUAN procedure if T_Delayed_final_PUAN is not 0.

If the MS capabilities are not yet known by the BSS at UL TBF establishment, the BSS shall be able to switch to
extended UL TBF mode if the MS capabilities are received before the release of the uplink TBF has been
initiated.

During the uplink TBF extension (i.e., after the last LLC frame has been received from the MS and no data is
being transmitted by the MS), it allows the network to initiate sending of data to the MS without performing a
downlink TBF establishment oncommon control channels.
It allows the MS to send data from newly arrived LLC frames after the countdown has started.

While in the delayed state the network must allocate some radio blocks, to allow the MS to restart the uplink
transfer whenever required by the application.
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 88

2 B9 features

2.2 Radio Network Planning Impact


1 1 89

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Traffic model changes: the feature will modify the number of UL TBF

activation+release on PACCH for all TCP/IP based applications and


WAP.
 The feature will also modify the average duration of an uplink TBF,
and as a consequence increase the number of MS multiplexed in
uplink.
 If necessary to reserve a certain bandwidth in uplink for QoS, then
the maximum number of MS in UL on the concerned PDCH should be
limited. (the current default value is of 5 MS multiplexed in uplink)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 89

2 B9 features

2.2 Radio Network Planning Impact [cont.]


1 1 90

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Some parameters are to be handled in order to set up and configure

this feature:

 EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF: Enable the extended TBF mode feature on the

uplink.
 T_MAX EXTENDED_UL: Maximum duration of the extended uplink TBF
phase. Recommended rule: value between 1s and 2s.
 EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED: Enable the transmission of USF every
20ms in extended mode, when the extended UL TBF feature is activated.
 EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE: Enable the Radio Acces Capability update on Gb.
Recommended rule: should be enabled if EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is
enabled and RA cap. update is supported by SGSN.

 It is recommended not to activate simultaneously extended UL TBF

feature (flag EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF) and the DL PDU rerouting


feature (flag EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING).

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

Fast USF UL extended : to keep the link alive in order to be ready as soon as needed. If n MSs in extended,
then USF for 1 MS sent every n x 20ms.
RA CAP Update : the MFS can request the RA capabilities of the MS to the SGSN (based on IMSI)

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 90

2 B9 features

2.3 Enhanced support of E-GPRS (EDGE) in uplink


1 1 91

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 In B9 support of MCS-5 to MCS-9 coding schemes in UL was

introduced.

Release

Modulation

B8

GMSK

B8

GMSK

B8

GMSK

MCS-1

B8

GMSK

MCS-3

B8

B8

B8
B8

GMSK

GMSK
GMSK

CS-1
CS-2
CS-3

User data
rate

8.0 kbit/s

12.0 kbit/s

14.4 kbit/s

CS-4

20.0 kbit/s

MCS-2

11.2 kbit/s

MCS-4

17.6 kbit/s

8.4 kbit/s

14.8 kbit/s

B9

8-PSK

MCS-5

22.4 kbit/s

B9

8-PSK

MCS-7

44.8 kbit/s

B9
B9
B9
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning

GMSK

Coding
scheme

8-PSK
8-PSK
8-PSK

MCS-6
MCS-8
MCS-9

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 91

29.6 kbit/s
54.4 kbit/s
59.2 kbit/s

2 B9 features

2.3 Enhanced support of E-GPRS (EDGE) in uplink [cont.]


1 1 92

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 In B9 release, Incremental Redundancy may be activated for both

the DL and UL paths. Thanks to Incremental Redundancy, the link


adaptation procedure can be more aggressive: if the chosen MCS is a
bit too optimistic, IR increases the probability of data recovery and
increases data rates considerably specially in poorer radio conditions
for higher MCSs.

 The link adaptation mechanism in UL is based on measurements

(MEAN_BEP, CV_BEP) done by the BTS on the radios blocks received


from the mobile. To take into account MCS-5 to MCS-9, the BSS
algorithm for link adaptation needs new link adaptation
MEAN_BEP/CV_BEP tables. These tables are the same as the one
already used for DL.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 92

2 B9 features

2.3.1 Radio Network Planning Impact


1 1 93

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 8-PSK in the UL should be considered in the planning tools for the

throughput and coverage estimation (based on interference


calculation). It impacts cell range estimates if the link-budget is UL
limited.

 The IR gain should also be considered in the throughput estimation :


 2 dB can be taken for the average IR gain.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 93

2 B9 features

2.4 Counter Improvements for Release B9


1 1 94

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

Counter Improvements for Release B9 feature covers four


candidate sub-features for B9:

1. Support of distributions: It introduces a new concept of counters

called distributions to obtain improved statistics on (E)GPRS resource


usage.
2. Consolidation of cell indicators at GPU level: It allows an operator to
consolidate each indicator defined at cell level per GPU. This operation
is very useful to follow possible lacks of GCH or GPU resources in a
given GPU.
3. Counters defined at TRX level: It introduces a few counters defined at
TRX level to follow the radio and transmission resource usage.
4. New MFS counters: It consists in defining a few new counters to ease
the dimensioning and optimisation of (E)GPRS networks.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 94

2 B9 features

2.4 Counter Improvements for Release B9 [cont.]


1 1 95

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Support of distributions
Counter

Mnemonic

Rationale

P453a

DISTRIB_UL_TBF_DURATION

The distribution of the UL TBF duration is interesting to:


-Differentiate the type of traffic (GMM signalling, Web browsing, FTP transfers, etc.).
-Check the validity of the UL TBF duration reported by the PM counters. For instance, the average is
meaningless if long TBFs are not distinguished from short TBFs.
-Justify certain bad throughputs observed in the fields.
-The corresponding thresholds should be tuneable to allow isolating a given traffic for a deep field
analysis.

P453b

DISTRIB_DL_TBF_DURATION

Same rationale as P453a but for the DL direction

P454a

DISTRIB_UL_TBF_VOLUME

The distribution of the UL LLC volume is interesting to:


-Differentiate the type of traffic (GMM signalling, Web browsing, FTP transfers, etc.).
-Check the validity of the UL LLC volumes (measured in bytes) reported by the PM counters. For
instance, the average is meaningless if long TBFs generating high UL LLC volumes are not
distinguished from short TBFs generating small UL LLC volumes.
-Justify certain bad throughputs observed in the fields.
-The corresponding thresholds should be tuneable to allow isolating a given traffic for a deep field
analysis.

P454b

DISTRIB_DL_TBF_VOLUME

Same rationale as P454a but for the DL direction

P455a

DISTRIB_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC

The distribution of the number of PDCH units assigned to an UL TBF is required to check whether
non-optimal allocations come from a lack of radio resources. In this case, parameters like
MAX_PDCH, MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD can be increased.

P455b

DISTRIB_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC

Same rationale as P455b but for the DL direction

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 Support of distributions

Actually, Support of distributions is an enhancement for the feature Radio Measurement Statistics
(RMS), introduced on release B7.2, in order to get statistics on radio measurements such as RXLEV,
RXQUAL, interference level, timing advance, MS or BS transmitted power, etc.

This sub-feature introduces a new concept of counters to monitor PS resource usage. The existing PS
counters count a number of events occurring during the reporting period (i.e. every hour). However,
such counters do not allow retrieving the distribution of the events. For instance, existing counters
allow evaluating the averaged duration of the TBFs. However, it is interesting to know what is the
proportion of short TBFs compared to long TBFs, to evaluate the type of GPRS traffic, to understand
the throughput measured in the fields, etc.. New counters, called distribution, were introduced. The
B7.2 RMS feature is based on the following principles:
- The operator can launch RMS from the OMC-R on a per cell or per BSC basis for a given duration (up
to 23 hours).
- The radio measurements are monitored the closest to the observed functions, i.e. in the BTS.

- During the observation period, it is possible to launch extended measurement reporting in order to
get measurements on radio frequencies not used for CS/PS traffic in the cell.

The measurements are usually reported in vectors made of 10 values (or matrixes made of several
vectors). The ranges of each vector are defined by 9 thresholds. These thresholds are changeable at
the OMC-R.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 95

2 B9 features

2.4 Counter Improvements for Release B9 [cont.]


1 1 96

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Consolidation of cell indicators at GPU level


Reference

Definition

P105c

Number of DL TBF establishment failures due to GPU congestion.

P105e

Number of DL TBF establishment failures due to CPU processing power limitations of the
GPU.

P105d

P105f
P105g

P105h

Number of UL TBF establishment failures due to GPU congestion.

Instance
Cell
Cell
Cell

Number of UL TBF establishment failures due to CPU processing power limitations of the
GPU.

Cell

Number of UL TBF establishment failures due to a lack of transmission resources.

Cell

Number of DL TBF establishment failures due to a lack of transmission resources.

Cell

 The sub-feature consists in allowing the operator to consolidate cell

counters P105c/d/e/f/g/h at GPU level.


Also, without this consolidation, it is up to the MFS to perform the
consolidation, which is in contradiction with the usual principles.
Indeed, it is not the role of the MFS to perform computation on
counters.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 96

2 B9 features

2.4 Counter Improvements for Release B9 [cont.]


1 1 97

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 New MFS counters


Counter

Mnemonic

P38f

CUMULATED_TIME_PDCH_USED_UL_CELL

P38e

CUMULATED_TIME_PDCH_USED_DL_CELL

P451b

CUMULATED_TIME_PDCH_DL_TBF_CELL

P98f

NB_SUSP_UL_TBF_REL

P98e

NB_SUSP_DL_TBF_REL

P451a

P452

CUMULATED_TIME_PDCH_UL_TBF_CELL

CUMULATED_TIME_PDCH_DL_TBF_GMM_SIG_CELL

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

Rationale

This counter is used with P451a to quantify the


overlapping of the UL TBFs on the PDCHs. For instance, a
high overlapping factor can explain why the throughputs
observed in the fields are low.
Same rationale as P38f but for the DL direction.

This counter is used with P38f to quantify the


overlapping of the UL TBFs on the PDCHs. For instance, a
high overlapping factor can explain why the throughputs
observed in the fields are low.
Same rationale as P451a but for the DL direction.

This counter is used to quantify the part of the GMM


signalling traffic over the whole (E)GPRS traffic. For
instance, this information is required to know how many
radio resources should be configured to carry only GMM
signalling traffic.

This counter is defined to obtain a more accurate


indicator for TBF drops. Operators are carefully analysing
the TBF drop rate that it is one of the main (E)GPRS QoS
figures.
Same rationale as P98f but for the DL direction.
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

Class B
Class B mobile phones can be attached to both GPRS and GSM services, using one service at a time. Class B
enables making or receiving a voice call, or sending/receiving an SMS during a GPRS connection. During voice
calls or SMS, GPRS services are suspended and then resumed automatically after the call or SMS session has
ended.
 This is suspend / resume

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 97

2 B9 features

2.4.1 Radio Network Planning Impact


1 1 98

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The new counters and distributions should allow us to improve the

existing (E)GPRS traffic model (i.e. better accuracy of the model can
be achieved) but no impact on radio and other telecom
performances is expected.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 98

2 B9 features

2.5 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation


1 1 99

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The purpose of this feature is to give to the MFS all the radio

timeslots that are usable for PS traffic, according to the whole BSS
load (CS and PS loads). The MFS needs no more to request radio
timeslots to the BSC; instead the MFS is always aware of all the
available radio timeslots.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 99

2 B9 features

2.5 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation [cont.]


1 1 100

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Main principles:

 CS and PS allocation separation with expected result of higher mean TBF

throughputs.
 To give to the MFS all the radio timeslots that are usable for PS traffic
Max CS traffic without PS traffic
Max PS traffic without CS traffic

Max PS traffic when high CS traffic


reserved for PS priority for PS

priority for CS

reserved for CS

MIN_SPDCH
MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT
MAX_SPDCH

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT is computed by the BSC and defines the number of SPDCHs that are allocated to the

MFS (based on the whole BSS load)

 The allocated SPDCHs are always those having the highest priority for PS allocations and their positions

are provided to the MFS within a new message called Radio Resource (RR) Allocation Indication message

 TBFs allocated in the MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD zone cannot be pre-empted (T1 re-allocation) when

MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT value decreases

 Periodically, the MFS sends to the BSC a Radio Resource Usage Indication message. This message

contains the allocated SPDCHs in the MFS as well as their usage. This message is used by the BSC to
estimate the PS load

 If required, the MFS may pre-empt a few SPDCHs to give them back to the BSC. The MFS uses the same

Radio Resource Usage Indication message to indicate to the BSC the de-allocated SPDCHs and to
acknowledge the allocation of new SPDCHs

Reserved for PS: This zone defines the number of radio resources reserved for PS traffic. No CS traffic can
be carried in that zone. The size of this zone is defined by the parameter MIN_SPDCH.
Priority for PS: This zone defines a number of radio resources where CS and PS traffic can be carried, but
the preference is given to PS traffic in that zone. The size of this zone is defined by the parameters
MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD and MIN_SPDCH.

Priority for CS: This zone defines a number of radio resources where CS and PS traffic can be carried, but
the preference is given to CS traffic in that zone. The size of this zone is given by the difference between the
parameters MAX_SPDCH and MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD.

Reserved for CS: This zone defines the number of radio resources reserved for CS traffic. No PS traffic can
be carried in that zone. The size of this zone is defined thanks to the parameter MAX_SPDCH.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 100

2 B9 features

2.5.1 Radio Network Planning Impact


1 1 101

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation

 -100 ms gain in the DL or UL TBF establishment duration

 As the maximum number of radio resources is allocated to the MFS, the

TBF establishment duration (DL or UL) is reduced compared to the B8


solution (if the MFS requests for additional radio resources to establish
the TBF).
 This could lead to an increase in the average TBF throughputs at cell
level.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 101

2 B9 features

2.6 2G/3G Inter-working


1 1 102

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Improve the 3G neighborhood description in 2G cells


 Consistent with the cell reselection strategy in B9
 2G/3G Interoperability feature comprises two sub-features:
 Improved 3G cell reselection

Neighbour UTRAN FDD cells are provided in SI2quater (new message)


 UTRAN frequencies are defined at GSM cell level (3/cell at max)
 Neighbour UTRAN FDD cells are described at the OMC with their UTRAN FDD
frequencies Scrambling Codes and Diversity


 Load based 3G HO filtering

The BSS may reject an external HO incoming from the UTRAN, provided the HO
has not been triggered by an emergency cause
 Current load will be compared with a new threshold, namely
THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 102

2 B9 features

2.6 2G/3G Inter-working [cont.]


1 1 103

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Improved 3G cell reselection

 The B9 Improved 3G cell reselection feature allows the operator to

declare per 2G cell basis the 3G neighbor cells (the FDD UMTS frequencies
and the scrambling codes). Maximum 3 FDD UMTS frequencies may be
declared per cell basis. When knowing in advance the frequency and the
scrambling code of a 3G cell, an MS should require 10 to 20ms to
synchronize on that cell.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 103

2 B9 features

2.6 2G/3G Inter-working [cont.]


1 1 104

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Load based 3G HO filtering

 Regarding the current load, the BSS may reject an external hand-over

coming from the UTRAN, provided the hand-over has not been triggered
by an emergency cause, i.e. provided the hand-over request does not
carry a cause type uplink/downlink quality/strength.

 Radio Network Planning Impact

 These sub-features impact traffic model, allowing faster 2G-to-3G cell

reselection to a new cell or denying incoming handovers in a loded


condition. It will result in a higher aggregated throughput in the cell or in
less call drops experienced by a source 3G cell.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 104

2 B9 features

2.6.1 Radio Network Planning Impact


1 1 105

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 These sub-features impact traffic model, allowing faster 2G-to-3G

cell reselection to a new cell or denying incoming handovers in a


loaded condition. It will result in a higher aggregated throughput in
the cell or in less call drops experienced by a source 3G cell.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 105

2 B9 features

2.7 M-EGCH Statistical Multiplexing


1 1 106

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 This feature provides a solution to share the Ater and Abis nibbles

between the radio timeslots of a TRX so that the transmission


resources left available by a PDCH can be re-used by other PDCHs
as long as those PDCHs belong to the same TRX. Thus allows
reducing the waste of transmission bandwidth on the Ater and Abis
interfaces.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 Terminology

M-EGCH

- The term M-EGCH (Multiplexed-EGCH) is used to refer to a link established between the MFS and
the BTS. An M-EGCH is defined per TRX (instead of an EGCH per radio timeslot in release B8).

GCH

- A GCH is the 16kb/s channel between the MFS and the BTS. It is composed of an Ater nibble and an
Abis nibble cross-connected together in the BSC. The MFS or the BTS periodically send blocks on a
GCH every 20 ms.

GCH frame

- In 20 ms period (also called block period), a number of 320 bits of this GCH can be used: this is the
frame.

Segment

- A segment is formed by a part of an RLC block (after its segmentation on the M-EGCH link) and a
GCH header (different for first segment and subsequent segments). RLC data might be padded or a
segment can be a no-data segment.

- Note that in B9 a frame can be constituted of several segments belonging to different RLC blocks as
now all the RLC blocks sent on several PDCHs of a TRX are multiplexed on the same M-EGCH link.
Padding bits are added to the RLC blocks segments to fill the frame to 320 bits.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 106

2 B9 features

2.7 M-EGCH Statistical Multiplexing [cont.]


1 1 107

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The M-EGCH Statistical Multiplexing solution allows to share a given

number of GCHs at a TRX level, i.e between the radio timeslots of


one TRX, so that:

 the transmission resource left available by one TBF mapped on a set of

RTS and being idle (eg, in establishment or delayed release phase) is


automatically reused by another TBF mapped on the same RTSs or on
another set of RTSs (as long as those sets of RTS are on the same TRX ).
 an increase of MCS, i.e. of throughput experienced by one TBF, does not
lead to an increase of transmission links need since this increase can be
compensated by a decrease of MCS experienced by another TBF.

 The GCH left while the control blocks are transferred can also be re-

used by other TBFs (which is not the case in B8); indeed control
blocks are encoded with CS1 and do not use an entire 320-bit frame.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

The Statistical Multiplexing introduces a new segmentation of the radio blocks on the M-EGCH link: the blocks
of all the PDCHs of the TRX are sent one after the other without padding between them. As in B8 a block for a
PDCH can be spread over several 320-bit frames but after its last segment the block of another PDCH can be
started (if the remaining transmission capacity is sufficient). So a fixed 320-bit frame can have up to 2 or 3
segments of variable size. As in B8, the unused part of a 320bit frame (once all the PDCHs have been
scheduled) is filled with padding and the unused GCHs with a NODATA PDU.
The EGCH layer is highly impacted to support the statistical multiplexing and is renamed M-EGCH layer in
B9. This feature only applies to G3 and G4 TRX while the G2 DRFU TRX uses a B7.2 like GCH stack (1 GCH
allocated per PDCH to support up to CS2 TBFs).

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 107

2 B9 features

2.7.1 Radio Network Planning Impact


1 1 108

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Statistical multiplexing at M-EGCH layer does increase the BSS PS

capacity without running out of Abis/Ater resources.

 Increase of BSC capacity in terms of # of TRXs allows :


 higher PS throughputs

 lower PS blocking/drop probabilities

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 108

2 B9 features

2.8 Dynamic Abis allocation


1 1 109

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 This feature enables, on the Abis, to dynamically allocate nibbles

among the different TREs used for PS traffic in a given BTS.


Compared to B8, it allows a higher average Abis bandwidth per PDCH,
the BSC capacity in terms of TRXs is increased, and in some BTS
configurations it may avoid to deploy a second Abis link. The extra
Abis nibbles are shared at BTS level.

 Radio Network Planning Impact


 Increase of BSC capacity in terms of # of TRXs handled allows higher

PS throughputs and could lead to lower PS blocking/drop


probabilities.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 109

2 B9 features

2.8.1 Radio Network Planning Impact


1 1 110

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Increase of BSC capacity in terms of # of TRXs handled allows higher

PS throughputs and could lead to lower PS blocking/drop


probabilities.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 110

2 B9 features

2.9 Enhanced transmission resource management


1 1 111

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Deals with the determination of the number and of the nature of the

16k GCH channels inside each M-EGCH. It is implemented as a


transmission resource manager. The transmission resource manager
is located at MFS/GPU level. It handles both Abis and Ater resources
at GCH level.

 It is in charge of:

 Creating and removing the M-EGCH links

 Selecting, adding, removing, and redistributing GCHs over the M-EGCH

links
 Managing transmission resource preemptions
 Managing Abis and/or Ater congestion states,

 Optionally, monitoring M-EGCH links usage, according to the (M)CS

of their supported TBFs (UL and DL).

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 Abis nibbles sharing rules:

To ensure that, anytime, each cell of a given BTS would be able to support PS traffic, we should
guarantee a minimal number of Abis nibbles to every cell in the BTS. Consequently, it has been
decided that basic Abis nibbles are only shared at cell level (i.e. among TRXs of the same cell or
sector). This restriction prevents some cells from using the whole Abis nibbles of the BTS as a
given cell cannot use the basic Abis nibbles of another cell. However, Extra (and Bonus) Abis
nibbles are shared at BTS level.

 Ater nibbles sharing rules:

A given amount of Ater transmission resource is allocated per GPU. Afterwards, this Ater
transmission resource is shared among the four DSPs of the GPU thanks to the GPU on-board Ater
switch.
Only 64K Ater TS are handled at GPU-level between DSPs. Thus, a 64K Ater TS may be moved
from one DSP to another if, and only if, all its four 16K Ater nibbles are free. This is the unique
restriction to Ater nibbles sharing at GPU-level.

Furthermore, to prevent the above restriction from disturbing the First GPRS traffic in a cell, an
Ater reserve shall always be available. The Ater reserve consists on one or several free 64K Ater
TSs and is defined per GPU. Every 64K TS of the Ater reserve may be connected to any DSP of the
GPU to fulfil GCH requests:
to establish the initial GCH in a cell with the Fast Initial GPRS Access feature activated, or;
to ensure the First GPRS traffic in a cell with no active initial GCH.

Each time a 64K TS is taken from the Ater reserve, a process is launched to retrieved another 64K
TS to replace it in the Ater reserve. This is done by means of GCH pre-emption on the Best effort
traffic supported by the GPU.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 111

2 B9 features

2.10 RMS_I1 Improvements


1 1 112

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The goal of the feature is to monitor the usage of each allowed

AMR codecs (FR or HR), and to provide statistics information on


timing advance.

 This feature allows monitoring the proper operation of AMR and the

quality of the radio coverage in a cell. It also gives the possibility to


tune the AMR parameters. Indeed, statistics about frame erasure
rate in uplink and comparison between codec distribution and RXLEV
allow assessing the voice quality, and adapting AMR thresholds to
the situation of a given cell.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 RMS_I1 Indicators:
Mnemonic
RMS_AMR_FR_UL_BAD
RMS_AMR_HR_UL_BAD
RMS_AMR_FR_UL_RXLEV_UL
RMS_AMR_HR_UL_RXLEV_UL
RMS_AMR_FR_DL_RXLEV_DL
RMS_AMR_HR_DL_RXLEV_DL

Definition
Number of bad speech frames using any
AMR FR codec in uplink
Number of bad speech frames using any
AMR HR codec in uplink
Number of speech frames using one
AMR FR codec in uplink per Rxlev on
the uplink path
Number of speech frames using one
AMR HR codec in uplink per Rxlev on
the uplink path
Number of speech frames using one
AMR FR codec in downlink per Rxlev on
the downlink path
Number of speech frames using one
AMR HR codec in downlink per Rxlev on
the downlink path

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 112

Formula
RMS44a
RMS45a
RMS46a
RMS48a
RMS47a
RMS49a

2 B9 features

2.10.1 Radio Network Planning Impact


1 1 113

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Knowing which codecs are the most used, and comparing them with

link level in the cell, the operator could assess the voice quality and
possibly adapt the AMR parameters (definition of the subset,
thresholds and hysteresis).

 These parameters are different for AMR FR and AMR HR, information

shall be provided separately for AMR FR and AMR HR.

 The codecs used in UL and in DL can be different; therefore

interpretation of results would be easier if results are provided


separately for uplink and downlink.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 113

2 B9 features

2.11 RMS_I2 Improvements


1 1 114

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The aim of this feature is to provide statistics information on

timing advance, in order to understand geographical traffic


distribution in a cell, to identify resurgences and hot spots.

 The improvement RMS_I2: Timing advance is a good indicator

about the mobile position relative to a cell.

 Its usage in RMS B7.2 is very limited: only measurement reports

done over a TA threshold are available, along with the max


measured TA. This information is not detailed enough to
understand geographical distribution in a cell, in order to identify
resurgences and hot spot.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 RM_I2 Indicators:

Mnemonic
RMS_TPR_TIMING_ADVANCE
RMS_TPR_UL_RXLEV_TA_BAN
D
RMS_TPR_DL_RXLEV_TA_BAN
D
RMS_TPR_UL_RXQUAL_TA_BA
ND
RMS_TPR_DL_RXQUAL_TA_BA
ND

Definition
The distribution of number of
measurement reports for which the value
of timing advance is in TA band
The average value of RXLEV per TA band
in uplink.
The average value of RXLEV per TA band
in downlink.
The average value of RXQUAL per TA
band in uplink.
The average value of RXQUAL per TA
band in downlink.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 114

Formula
RMS50a
RMS51
RMS52
RMS53
RMS54

2 B9 features

2.11.1 Radio Network Planning Impact


1 1 115

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 This RMS improvement described here would provide help to the

operator for optimization of his network planning, through


identification of these resurgences and hot spots. Detecting hot
spots can be very useful in order to re-design that part of the
network in a most adapted way to the experienced traffic load.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 115

1 1 116

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 116

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.1 Cell Reselection Overview


1 1 117

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 In GSM, when an MS in idle mode

moves from cell A to cell B, it


performs a cell reselection applying
the C1 or C2 criteria. In dedicated
mode, MS performs a handover

 For (E)GPRS, the MS does in GMM

selection
reselection
Cell 1

READY state (PTM) cell reselection

In the old cell an abnormal TBF release


takes place
 In the new cell the MS establishes a new
resource. (Different to handover in GSM,
where the new channel is reserved by the
network in advance)

Cell 2

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 117

RA A

Cell 3

RA B

LA 1

LA 2

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.1 Cell Reselection Overview [cont.]


1 1 118

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Three modes of cell reselection have been defined for a MS in GPRS

packet transfer mode:

 NC0 mode: (E)GPRS MS performs autonomous cell reselection without

sending measurement reports to the network


 NC1 mode: (E)GPRS MS performs autonomous cell reselection.
Additionally it sends measurement reports to the network
 NC2 mode: (E)GPRS MS shall not perform autonomous cell reselection. It
sends measurement reports to the network. The network controls the
cell reselection

 B9 release supports NC0 and NC2 modes

 NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER parameter defines whether the MS or the

BSS controls the cell reselections





NC0 mode: NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER = 0


NC2 mode: NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER = 3

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 118

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.1 Cell Reselection Overview [cont.]


1 1 119

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The attached (E)GPRS mobiles use different criteria, depending on whether

the PBCCH is present or not in the serving cell


 No PBCCH in the serving cell:


GMM standby:


Only NC0 mode is applied. Cell reselection is identical to the basic GSM cell reselection in idle mode.
C1 and C2 criteria are used

GMM ready:



NC2 mode is applied if set by the Operator. C1NC2, C2NC2 criteria are used
NC0 mode is applied if NC2 mode is not set and consequently C1, C31 and C32 criteria are used

 PBCCH established in the serving cell:




GMM standby:

GMM ready:




Only NC0 mode is applied. C1, C31 and C32 criteria are used
NC2 mode is applied if set by the Operator. C1NC2, C31NC2 and C32NC2 criteria are used
NC0 mode is applied if NC2 mode is not set and consequently C1, C31 and C32 criteria are used

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 In GSM

C1 = A - Max (0,B) with:

- A = RLA_C - RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN

- B = MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH - MS_TXPWR_MAX + POWER_OFFSET(1800)

C2 = C1 + CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET - TEMPORARY_OFFSET(T) when Penalty_time<31


C2 = C1 - CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET when Penalty_Time=31

 In GPRS ready and standby states, cell reselection is performed by the MS except for a class A MS while

in dedicated mode of a circuit switched connection, in which case the cell is determined by the
network according to the handover procedures.

 For a class B MS which can combine GSM and GPRS states, C1 criterion is used when the MS

simultaneously attached to both, the network and the MS is in Packet Idle Mode (refer to GSM 05.08).

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 119

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.1 Cell Reselection Overview [cont.]


1 1 120

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Independent from the presence of the PBCCH


 The GPRS cell adjacencies

are the same in packet idle mode as in packet transfer mode


 are set equal to the CS cell adjacencies (i.e. the BA(GPRS)=BA(BCCH) list )


 Recommendation is to enable the GPRS service on all cells in order to

prevent a MS to reselect a cell without GPRS support

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 120

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.2 Cell reselection: NC0 mode, no PBCCH established


1 1 121

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The same procedure as in GSM, with the following criteria applied:


 C1: the pathloss criterion, for cell selection and reselection
 C2: for cell reselection

 C1 criterion: the path loss criterion is satisfied if C1 > 0


 C1 = A - Max(B,0)

A = RLA_C - RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
B = MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH P

RLA_C = Received Level Average for CS service


 RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN = Minimum received signal level at the MS
required for access to the system
 MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH = Maximum TX power level an MS may use
when accessing the system
 P = Maximum RF output power of the MS


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 The cell n denotes either the serving cell or a neighboring cell.


 In the above equations, the following notations mean:

AV_RXLEV_NC2(n) is the average received signal level measured by the MS on the BCCH of the cell n.

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n) or GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n) is the minimum received signal level required


to perform an access to the cell n.

MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n) or GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n) is the maximum transmit power of the MS


when accessing the cell n.
 P(n) is the maximum output RF power of the MS in the BCCH frequency band of the cell n. P(n) gives

the MS Radio Access Capability Information Element provided in the Packet Resource Request message
or in the DL LLC PDU. In the NC cell reselection procedure, the parameter P(n) shall always refer to the
RF power capability of the GMSK modulation.

 Note that all values are expressed in dBm.

 The cell ranking criterion parameter C2NC2 is used to order the candidate cells on an radio criterion.

This criterion applies only in serving cells where there is no PBCCH established.

CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n) is a positive offset which favors or disfavors the cell n.

PENALTY_TIME(n) indicates whether the cell reselection offset shall be positive or negative.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 121

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.2 Cell reselection: NC0 mode, no PBCCH established [cont.]


1 1 122

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 C2 criterion:

 PENALTY_TIME <> 11111

C2 = C1 + CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET - TEMPORARY OFFSET *


H(PENALTY_TIME - T)






non-serving cells: H(x) = 0 for x < 0; H(x)= 1 for x 0


serving cells: H(x) = 0
T is a timer implemented for each cell in the list of strongest carriers. T shall be started
from zero at the time the cell is placed by the MS on the list of strongest carriers
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET may be used to give different priorities to different bands when
multiband operation is used
TEMPORARY_OFFSET applies a negative offset to C2 for the duration of PENALTY_TIME
after the timer T has started for that cell.

 PENALTY_TIME = 11111

C2 = C1 - CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET
 If CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND = 0 then C2 = C1

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 122

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.3 Cell reselection: NC0 mode, PBCCH established


1 1 123

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The following criteria are applied for cell reselection:


 C1: when C1< 0

 C31, C32: when a non-serving cell is evaluated to be better than the

serving cell

 C1: the pathloss criterion

 Is used as a minimum signal level criterion for cell reselection for GPRS

in the same way as for GSM Idle mode criterion


 Same as defined, but with specific GPRS parameters:
 C1 = A - Max(B,0)
A = RLA_P - GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
B = GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH P


GPRS specific parameters, are broadcast on PBCCH of the serving cell

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 123

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.3 Cell reselection: NC0 mode, PBCCH established [cont.]


1 1 124

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 C31: the signal level threshold criterion parameter for hierarchical

cell structures (HCS)

 Is used to determine whether prioritized hierarchical GPRS and LSA cell

re-selection shall apply


 For cells that fulfill C31criteria (C31>0):


The best cell is the cell with the highest C32 value, among those cells that
have the highest priority class, among those cells that have highest LSA priority

 If no cell fulfils the C31 criterion:




The best cell is the cell with the highest C32 value, among all the neighbor
cells

 C32: cell ranking criterion parameter is used to select cells among

those with the same priority class

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 The signal level threshold criterion parameter C31NC2 is used in hierarchical cellular networks to

determine whether the signal level received from a neighboring cell n is sufficient to redirect the MS
towards cell n based on a non-radio priority criterion. This criterion parameter is used only if there is a
PBCCH established in the serving cell. HCS_THR(n) defines a signal threshold for applying the
prioritized hierarchical GPRS cell reselection criterion. The cell n denotes either the serving cell or a
neighboring cell. Contrary to the C31 criterion implemented in the MS, the Alcatel BSS does not
manage the timer T implemented for each cell to monitor the time a neighboring cell is present in the
list of the strongest carriers. Therefore, the Alcatel BSS always assumes that
GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n) = 0. As the GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS,
RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS, and C31_HYST are used to control the triggering conditions of a cell
reselection, they are not taken into account in the criterion C31NC2 and C32NC2 parameters.

The cell ranking criterion parameter C32NC2 is used to order the candidate cells on an radio criterion.
This criterion applies only in serving cells where there is a PBCCH established.
GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET(n) applies a positive or negative offset which favors or disfavors the
neighboring cell n. The cell n denotes either the serving cell or a neighboring cell. If the parameter
C32_QUAL is set, the determination of C32NC2 is modified so that the neighboring cell n having the
highest AV_DL_RXLEV_NC2 among all the neighboring cells is applied a GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET
(only if the offset is positive) and no GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET is applied to the other neighboring
cells.

 The MFS shall take care of avoiding ping-pong effects between the old cell and the new cell (i.e.,

circular NC cell reselections). For that purpose, the MFS handles an anti-ping-pong timer and an anti
ping-pong offset, respectively called T_NC_PING_PONG and NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET. While the timer
T_NC_PING_PONG is running the neighboring cells are disfavored by the offset NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET
(expressed in dB) in the cell ranking process.

 The MFS starts the anti-ping-pong timer at the creation of the NC2 context for the MS.
 The MFS stops the anti ping-pong timer at the deletion of the NC2 context.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 124

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.3 Cell reselection: NC0 mode, PBCCH established [cont.]


1 1 125

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 C31 criterion

 Serving cell:

C31(s) = RLA_P(s) GPRS_HCS_THR(s)

 Neighbor cell:

C31(n) =

GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(n)

GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(n)

GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(s)

GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(s)

<>

T(n) <= GPRS_PENALTY_TIME(n)

= RLA_P(n) GPRS_HCS_THR(n)
GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n)

= RLA_P(n) - GPRS_HCS_THR(n)

T(n) > GPRS_PENALTY_TIME(n)

= RLA_P(n) - GPRS_HCS_THR(n)

= RLA_P(n) - GPRS_HCS_THR(n)

RLA_P is the received level average for PS service (i.e. C value)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 125

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.3 Cell reselection: NC0 mode, PBCCH established [cont.]


1 1 126

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The following parameters are broadcast on PBCCH of the serving

cell:

 GPRS_HCS_THR is the signal threshold for applying HCS GPRS and LSA re-

selection

Min: -110 dBm; Max: -48 dBm; Default: -84 dBm

 GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS is the HCS priority of the cell

Min: 0 (lowest); Max: 7 (highest); Default: 0

 GPRS_PENALTY_TIME is the time during which the

GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET is active in neighbour cells


Min: 10s; Max: 320s ; Default: 10s

 GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET applies a negative offset to C31/C32 for the

duration of GPRS_PENALTY_TIME after the timer T has started for that


cell
Min: 0; Max: infinity (coded 7); Default: 0

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 126

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.3 Cell reselection: NC0 mode, PBCCH established [cont.]


1 1 127

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 C32 criterion

 Serving Cell:

C32(s) = C1(s)
 Neighbor cell:
C32(n) =

GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(n)

GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(n)

GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(s)

GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(s)

= C1(n) +
GPRS_ RESELECTION_OFFSET(n)

= C1(n) +
GPRS_ RESELECTION_OFFSET(n)

<>

T(n) <= GPRS_PENALTY_TIME(n)


T(n) > GPRS_PENALTY_TIME(n)


= C1(n) +
= C1(n) +
GPRS_ RESELECTION_OFFSET(n) GPRS_ RESELECTION_OFFSET(n)
GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n)

GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET is used to apply an permanent offset for GPRS cell


reselection in neighbor cells
Min: -52 dBm; Max: +48 dBm; Default: 4 dBm

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 C1 is the same as in GSM except that

A = RLA_P GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN: listening capacity of MS in the cell

B = GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH P: talking capacity of MS in the cell

C1 shall be positive and as high as possible


 C32:

if C32_QUAL=1, positive GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET value shall only be applied to the


neighboring cell with the highest RLA_P value of those cells for which C32 is compared above.
If GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET (neighbor) >0, the cell has a bonus to reselection

If GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET (neighbor) <0, the cell has a handicap for reselection


 In Packet Idle Mode, the MS shall make one measurement for each BCCH carrier monitored every 4

seconds, as well as more than one sample per second for each BCCH carrier.

 A list of 6 strongest cells shall be kept updated at a rate of at least one update per running average

period.

 In Packet Transfer Mode, the MS shall monitor a list of 6 strongest non-serving cell BCCH carriers. It

shall attempt to check the BSIC for each of these 6 strongest cells at least once every 10 seconds.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 127

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.3 Cell reselection: NC0 mode, PBCCH established [cont.]


1 1 128

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 C32 is an improvement of C2. It applies an individual offset and

hysteresis value to each pair of cells, as well as the same temporary


offsets as for C2.
 Additional hysteresis values apply for a cell re-selection that requires

cell or routing area update

 With C32, neighbor cells can be favored through the

GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET(n) broadcast on the PBCCH. This allows


favoring neighbor cells e.g. based on their frequency band
 C32 also gives the possibility to temporarily penalize neighbor cells
having the same priority as the serving cell (contrary to C31 that
penalizes cells of different priorities). The penalty is computed
based on the GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n) and
GPRS_PENALTY_TIME(n) parameters, like for C31

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 128

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.3 Cell reselection: NC0 mode, PBCCH established [cont.]


1 1 129

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 If cell B is belonging to another Routing Area (RA) than cell A, the

MS has to make RA update

 additional hysteresis are applied to avoid unnecessary RA updates:

CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS hysteresis for cell reselection applied on C1


criterion (no PBCCH), when the new cell is in a different LA or, for a GPRS MS,
in a different RA, or when a GPRS MS is in GMM ready state
 RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS indicates in both STANDBY and READY state the
additional hysteresis which applies on C31 and C32 (with PBCCH) when
selecting a cell in a new RA


 C31_HYST: Determines whether an additional cell hysteresis shall be

applied to the C31 criterion in same RA, in READY state


 GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS additional hysteresis

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 129

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.4 Cell reselection execution: NC0 in PTM


1 1 130

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 THERE ARE NO HANDOVERS IN GPRS

The MS is performing now Cell Reselection during a TBF


 it leaves the coverage area of the cell or enters in a building

 if a neighbor cell is better (from C Criterion point of view), the MS

performs a cell re-selection  abnormal TBF release happens


 in the new cell, a new TBF is automatically established, after (P)SI
information acquisition
 only the remaining data from the old TBF will be sent then
automatically
 Coding scheme adaptation is active in parallel and independently
triggered

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 130

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.4 Cell reselection execution: NC0 in PTM [cont.]


1 1 131

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Typical GPRS data transmission with cell reselection


Throughput
[kbit/s]

Data Call Duration


1. CS change

1. CS change

TBF 1 (Cell 1)

Cell
Re-Selection

TBF 2 (Cell 2)

CS 2

Average
Throughput
Throughput
CS 1

t0
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning

t1

t2

t3

t4

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 131

t5

Time
[s]

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode


1 1 132

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 In NC2 mode of operation, the BSS controls the cell reselections of

all MS when in packet transfer mode (PTM) or of all MS when in GMM


Ready state (depending on the selected NC2 deactivation mode)
 While the NC2 mode is activated for the concerned MS, the MS sends

packet measurements reports (PMR) to the BSS

 Aim: NC2 mode is to limit the number of reselections to the strict

necessary ones  increased data throughput

 Alcatel NC2 implementation allows to favor GPRS traffic inside GPRS

preferred cells (GPRS redirection)

Particular layer (e.g. macro)


 Particular frequency band (e.g. GSM 900)


 reduced impact on signaling load

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 Each time the MS performs a cell reselection, the data transfer is interrupted and a retransmission of

some LLC PDUs may be required:

The on-going TBF is released in the old cell.

The MS performs the PSI or SI acquisition in the new cell.

Then, the MS establishes a new UL TBF in this cell to send a Cell Update message to the SGSN.
The MFS deletes or reroutes towards the new cell the LLC PDUs stored in the old cell.
- if they are deleted, a retransmission is needed.

Finally, the data transfer is re-started (after a DL TBF establishment, in case of DL transfer).

 All these steps degrade the data throughput or the page access time perceived by the enduser.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 132

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode [cont.]


1 1 133

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 NC2 activation

 An MS transit to NC2 mode when it receives a PACKET MEASUREMENT

ORDER message from the BSS, at the beginning of a data transfer. It


provides mainly the NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T which is the reporting
period of NC measurements sent by the MS while in PTM (default = 0.96s)

 Measurement reporting and processing

 MS periodically reports its NC2 measurements on PACCH through a

PACKET MEASUREMENT REPORT


 The BSS handles the following measurements:

UL serving cell: RXQUAL for GPRS TBF and mean BEP for EGPRS TBF
 DL serving cell: RXQUAL for GPRS TBF and mean BEP for EGPRS TBF
 DL serving and neighbor cells: RXLEV measurements of BCCH


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is a cell parameter tunable at the OMC-R.


 The R97 and R98 MSs are differentiated from the other MSs. Indeed, all the MSs shall support the NC2

mode, however since no network manufacturer has implemented the NC2 mode, the R97 and R98 MSs
may not have been sufficiently tested and therefore there is a risk of interoperability with these MSs.

 The Packet Measurement Order message is used to activate and de-activate the NC2 mode of

operation for a given MS.

Activation

- The Packet Measurement Order (NC2) message is sent when:

establishing the first Downlink TBF of the Packet Transfer Mode or when re-establishing
the DL TBF while T3192 is running and there is not any on-going UL TBF.

no measurement report has already been received for that MS during its on-going packet
transfer(s) (UL and/or DL).
the MS has not been forced to operate in NC2 mode by a Packet Cell Change Order
message (during an intra-RA cell reselection).

De-activation

- The Packet Measurement Order (RESET) message is sent at the end of the data transfer, in
case of NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE = NC2 deactivation at the end of the packet transfer.
- When the MS goes back to the STANDBY state, in case of NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE = NC2
deactivation at GMM Ready timer expiry.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 133

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode [cont.]


1 1 134

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Cell reselection detection

 NC2 reselection are triggered only for EMERGENCY or for POWER BUDGET

causes:

Cause
 Cause
 Cause
 Cause


PT
PT
PT
PT

1:
2:
3:
4:

Too low DL received signal level


Detection of a better cell
Too bad DL radio quality
Too bad UL radio quality

 The criteria calculated by the BSS in NC2 mode are very near from those

used by the MS in NC0 mode. This ensures that the target cell selected
by the MS in NC0 mode or by the BSS in NC2 mode are identical in quite
all cases


C1NC2, C2NC2, C31NC2 and C32NC2 criteria are calculated by the BSS and the
parameters defined for cell reselections in NC0 are re-used

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 134

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode [cont.]


1 1 135

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Cause PT1: Too low DL received signal level

 AV_DL_RXLEV_NC2 < NC_DL_RXLEV_THR + Max(BNC2,0)

NC_DL_RXLEV_THR = -110 dBm (Never)  deactivates Cause PT1


 Cause PT1 is equivalent to check the condition C1NC2 < 0 assuming that the
(GPRS_)RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN threshold is replaced by NC_DL_RXLEV_THR
threshold


 C1NC2: Pathloss Criterion parameter




C1NC2(n) = ANC2(n) max(BNC2(n),0)

No PBCCH
ANC2(n) = AV_RXLEV_NC2(n) RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)
BNC2(n) = MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n) P(n)
 PBCCH established
ANC2(n) = AV_RXLEV_NC2(n) GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)
BNC2(n) = GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n) P(n)


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

The cause PT1 is equivalent to check the condition C1NC2 < 0 assuming that the (GPRS_)RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
threshold is replaced with NC_DL_RXLEV_THR threshold.
Max (Bnc2,0) = handicap on threshold if MS can't reach max UL tx power recommended in the cell

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 135

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode [cont.]


1 1 136

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Cause PT2: Detection of a better neighbor cell


 AV_DL_RXLEV_NC2 NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR

and
{
No PBCCH:
C2NC2(n) > C2NC2(s) + NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS (s,n)
PBCCH established:
C32NC2(n) > C32NC2(s) + NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS (s,n)
}

NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS (s,n) defined per cell adjacency link


 NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR = -110 dBm (Never)  disables Cause PT2
 The cell n denotes either the serving cell or a neighbor cell


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

Cause PT2 is checked among the neighboring cells n upon receipt of a Packet Measurement Report message. It
is triggered if the value C2NC2 or C32NC2 of one neighboring cell n exceeds the value C2NC2 or C32NC2 of the
serving cell s by at least the O&M hysteresis NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(s,n) defined per cell adjacency link
(respectively whether or not there is a PBCCH in the serving cell).

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 136

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode [cont.]


1 1 137

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 C2NC2: Cell ranking criterion parameter

 used to order the candidate cells on a radio criterion and applies only in

serving cells where there is no PBCCH established

 PENALTY_TIME(n) <> 11111:

C2NC2(n) = C1NC2(n) + CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)


 PENALTY_TIME(n) = 11111:
C2NC2(n) = C1NC2(n) CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n) is a positive offset which favors or disfavors the
cell n
 PENALTY_TIME(n) indicates whether the cell reselection offset shall be positive
or negative
 The n denotes either the serving cell or a neighbor cell


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

Same parameter as GSM Reselection


"11111" = value 31 (or infinity)

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 137

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode [cont.]


1 1 138

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 C31NC2: signal level threshold criterion parameter

 Used in hierarchical networks to determine whether the signal level

received from a neighbor cell n is sufficient to redirect the MS towards


cell n based on a non-radio priority criterion
 Used only if there is a PBCCH established in the serving cell
 C31NC2(n) = AV_RXLEV_NC2(n) HCS_THR(n)

HCS_THR(n) defines a signal threshold for applying the prioritized hierarchical


GPRS cell reselection criterion
 The cell n denotes either the serving cell or a neighbor cell


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 138

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode [cont.]


1 1 139

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 C32NC2: cell ranking criterion parameter

 Used to order the candidate cells on a radio criterion

 Applies only in serving cells where there is a PBCCH established


 Cell n is the serving cell:

C32NC2(n) = C1NC2(n)
 Cell n is a neighbor cell:
C32NC2(n) = C1NC2(n) + GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)


GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET(n) applies an positive or negative offset which favors


or disfavors the neighbor cell n. Cell n denotes either the serving cell or a
neighbor cell

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 139

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode [cont.]


1 1 140

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Cause PT3: Too bad downlink radio quality


 AV_DL_RXQUAL_NC2 > NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR

NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR: threshold above which Cause PT3 is triggered due to a


too bad RXQUAL in DL (while the MS is in PTM)
Min: 0; Max: 7; Default: 7; step size: 0.1
 NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR = 7 (Never)  deactivates Cause PT3


 Cause PT4: Too bad uplink radio quality

 AV_UL_RXQUAL_NC2 > NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR

NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR: threshold above which Cause PT4 is triggered due to a


too bad RXQUAL in UL (while the MS is in PTM)
Min: 0; Max: 7; Default: 7; step size: 0.1
 NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR = 7 (Never)  deactivates Cause PT4


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 Cause PT4

is checked only for the serving cell whenever one UL RLC data block is correctly received for the ongoing UL TBF provided that T_NC_RXQUAL_VALID seconds have elapsed since the computation of the
first UL samples of the UL TBF.

T_NC_RXQUAL_VALID aims at not triggering false alarms at the beginning of the TBF and not
triggering an NC cell reselection for a very short TBF.
 Cause PT3

is checked only for the serving cell each time a (EGPRS) Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message is
received provided that the DL TBF is not in delayed release state and provided that the
T_NC_RXQUAL_VALID seconds have elapsed since the receipt of the first Packet Downlink Ack/Nack
message of the DL TBF.
T_NC_RXQUAL_VALID aims at not triggering false alarms at the beginning of the TBF and not
triggering an NC cell reselection for a very short TBF.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 140

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode [cont.]


1 1 141

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Candidate cell evaluation

 Cell Filtering: this process removes from the list candidates the cells to

which a previous NC2 cell reselection failed


 Cell Ranking:


No PBCCH


The cell are ranked to their C2NC2 value. The best cell candidate is the cell having the
highest C2NC2 value

PBCCH established


The cell are ranked based on the C31NC2 and C32NC2 criteria. Among the cells, the best
cell is the cell with the highest C32NC2 value among:
o For cells that fulfill C31NC2criterion (C31NC2>0):

Those cells having the highest PRIORITY_CLASS(n)

o If no cell fulfill C31NC2 criterion:

All cells

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 141

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode [cont.]


1 1 142

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Cell reselection execution

 The network triggers the cell reselection by sending a PACKET CELL CHANGE ORDER message

MS

Cell A

SGSN

Cell B

On-going data transfer (1)


Packet Measurement Report (2)

(3)

Packet Cell Change Order (4)


(6)

Packet Control Ack. (5)

UL TBF establishment (7)

UL LLC PDU (8)


Flush-LL PDU (9)

Flush-LL-Ack PDU (10)

 NC2 deactivation

 Two modes via the O&M parameter NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE:


 NC2 deactivation at the end of packet date transfer
 NC2 deactivation at Ready timer expiry

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 142

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.6 GPRS redirection


1 1 143

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Thanks to NC2 activation for MS in PTM

 B8/B9 release GPRS redirection is actually a NC cell reselection that

is triggered at the beginning of the PTM in the serving cell even if


the radio link is good
 Redirect the MS towards a target cell more appropriate to carry PS
traffic
 The operator may wish to favor GPRS traffic in a particular
layer/band:
 MULTILAYER NETWORK, it may be more efficient to define GPRS

resources in the UPPER LAYER only

Reduce the number of cell reselections


 Microcells have smaller traffic capacity and is assigned to CS


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 143

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.6 GPRS redirection [cont.]


1 1 144

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 MULTIBAND NETWORK, it may be more efficient to favor GPRS

traffic in the 900 MHz band, due to its better indoor penetration
 MS GPRS mainly used in indoor environment
 Gain in stability of the GPRS session

 Operator must tune the NC parameters so that a NC cell reselection

is systematically triggered at the beginning of a data transfer on


receipt of the first Packet Measurement Report

 E.g. NC cell reselection Cause PT1 can be always activated by setting

NC_DL_RXLEV_THR = - 47 dBm (Always)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 144

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.7 GPRS Power Control: Overview


1 1 145

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 GPRS power control is only implemented in uplink in open loop

configuration

 GSM recommendation 05.08

 During open loop power control, the MS adapts its output power in

UL per block (i.e. 4 timeslots), based on the measured average


signal strength in DL
 Open loop:
 There is no indication by the BTS whether the output power was

sufficiently low or high: the same path loss in UL and DL is assumed by


the MS

 When accessing the network on the (P)RACH the MS uses the output

power defined by (GPRS_)MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH, which is


broadcasted on the (P)BCCH

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 145

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.8 GPRS Power Control: Measurements


1 1 146

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 MS (E)GPRS performs the necessary LEVEL measurements for power

control algorithm, either on the BCCH of the serving cell or on the


PDCH (carrying the PACCH):
 The choice is made according to PC_MEAS_CHAN parameter, which is
broadcasted on the BCCH:
 PC_MEAS_CHAN = 1, measurements on PDCH (default)


24 measurements in 480 ms

12 measurements in 480 ms

 PC_MEAS_CHAN = 0, measurements on BCCH

 The LEVEL measurements are averaged with recursive filtering

algorithms
 The average levels are calculated by the MS in PIM and PTM modes,
thus proper average level available at transfer start

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 146

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.8 GPRS Power Control: Measurements [cont.]


1 1 147

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Averaging

 Recursive Filtering (in the MS) to obtain average level


 Recursive Filtering Formula:

Cn=a * SSn + (1-a) * Cn-1

Cn is the DL level average calculated by the MS (Cn-1 =previous value)


 SSn is mean of received signal level of 4 bursts
 a is the forgetting factor


 Packet Idle Mode

a = 1 / [min (n, max (5,T_AVG_W/TDRX) ) ]

TDRX= parameter which considers the number of measurements that are made
and the paging group; TDRX=BS_PA_MFRMS
 BS_PA_MFRMS = number of multiframes needed to send all paging groups
 T_AVG_W = 2k/2 /6 (k=1..25, recommended k < 12) is the signal level filter
period for PC in PIM


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 147

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.8 GPRS Power Control: Measurements [cont.]


1 1 148

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Packet transfer Mode

a = 1/[6* T_AVG_T] on BCCH


a = 1/[12* T_AVG_T] on PDCH

 T_AVG_T= 2k/2 /6 signal level filter period for PC in PTM


 k for T_AVG_T for measurements on BCCH or on PDCH:

GSM averaging window size


(A_LEV_PC)

Default value of k

[6-10]

[6-10]

4
8

10
12
14
16
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning

7
8
9
9

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 148

Range to
investigate
[1-7]
[5-9]

[6-10]
[6-10]
[7-10]

[7-10]

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.8 GPRS Power Control: Measurements [cont.]


1 1 149

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Averaging

 Tuning of k: average mechanism convergent between GSM and GPRS




Comparison between GSM averaging and the practical GPRS averaging with
A_LEV_PC=2 and K =4:

50

45

40

35

30

25

20
1

11

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

16

21

26

31

36

41

46

51

RXLEV_DL

56

61

66

71

76

GSM average

81

86

91

96 101 106 111 116 121 126 131 136 141

practical GPRS average

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 149

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.9 GPRS Power Control: Algorithm


1 1 150

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Each block is transmitted by the MS with the output power PCH:

PCH=min (0 - CH - * (C+48), (GPRS)MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH))


 0 : is the maximum classmark power of the MS



= 39 dBm in GSM 900/850/400


= 36 dBm in GSM 1800/1900

 CH : is sent to the MS. This parameter is used for grading the power

control to a target received level at the BTS side




Min:0; Max: 62; Default: 30 dB in GSM 900, 24 dB in GSM 1800

 : is send to the MS. This parameter can be described as a reactivity

factor. The 05.08 GSM recommendation suggest to use = 1 in order to


have an open loop power control
 C : is the DL level average calculated by the MS

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 150

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.9 GPRS Power Control: Algorithm [cont.]


1 1 151

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Tuning of CH and

 Idea: Tune PC algorithm to balance DL and UL paths

 = 1 (according to GSM 05.08)

 CH

tune CH in order to reach the Minimum UL Level (RXLEVUL) at the BTS


 CH = 0 - 48 - RXLEVUL - PBTS


 Balanced DL and UL paths:

 PMS - RXLEVUL = PBTS RXLEVDL

PBTS : BTS power; PMS: MS power


RXLEVUL: Received level at BTS side
 RXLEVDL: Received level at MS side (C value in the PC formula)



EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 151

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.9 GPRS Power Control: Algorithm [cont.]


1 1 152

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Example: Tuning of CH and


 Settings:

 MS_Power_MAX = 33 dBm

 PBTS after connector = 40 dBm

 =1

 CH

 tune CH in order to reach the Minimum RXLEVUL at the BTS side


 assume RXLEVUL = - 80 dBm



CH = 0 - 48 - RXLEVUL - PBTS
CH = 33 - 48 - (-80) - 40 = 25 dBm

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 152

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.10 Link adaptation: DL GPRS Radio Link Control


1 1 153

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 It relies on RXQUAL except between CS3 and CS4 adaptation, where

the new metric I_LEVEL_TNi (interference level) is also considered


 If CS-4 is used, the MS is allowed to report RXQUAL = 7

 AV_RXQUAL_ST (Short Term average), AV_RXQUAL_LT (Long Term

average) and AV_SIR (Signal to Interference Ratio) are respectively


averaged values at MFS side, of the RXQUAL and I_LEVEL_TNi
measurements received from the MS in Packet DL Ack/Nack
messages
 AV_RXQUAL_ST


Triggering condition AV_RXQual_ST aim to decrease the coding scheme number


as fast as possible when the radio conditions degraded significantly. Reaction
would be much slower if it was only based on a long-term average, which could
results in a TBF release

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 153

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.10 Link adaptation: DL GPRS Radio Link Control [cont.]


1 1 154

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

Interference measurements performed during


idle frames of the 52 multiframe (twice during
240ms):
 I_LEVEL_TN 0

=
 I_LEVEL_TN 1 =
 I_LEVEL_TN 2 =
 I_LEVEL_TN 3 =

I>C
C - 2dB < I C
C - 4dB < I C - 2dB
C - 6dB < I C - 4dB

MS

Packet DL Ack/Nack

(RXQUAL, I_Level_TNi)

...

 I_LEVEL_TN 14 = C - 28dB < I C - 26dB


 I_LEVEL_TN 15 = I C - 28dB

Packet DL Ack/Nack

(RXQUAL, I_Level_TNi)

MFS uses the I_LEVEL_TNi received to calculate


the AV_SIR value
 In case of DL GPRS TBF with PDCH allocated on
BCCH TRX and no frequency hopping on the
BCCH TRX, the MS does not report any
interference levels  usage of BLER (Block
Erasure Rate) instead of interference levels


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

MFS

Averaging

O&M threshold
and hysteresis

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 Drawback of putting GPRS on BCCH freq : no measure of interference levels

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 154

- AV_RXQUAL_ST
- AV_RXQUAL_LT
- AV_SIR
Link
adaptation
new CS

current CS

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.10 Link adaptation: DL GPRS Radio Link Control [cont.]


1 1 155

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Coding Scheme changing decision for a downlink GPRS TBF:


Current
CS

CSi -> CSi+1

CSi -> CSi-1

CS1

AV_RXQUAL_LT < CS_QUAL_DL_1_2

CS2

AV_RXQUAL_LT < CS_QUAL_DL_2_3


AV_RXQUAL_LT < CS_QUAL_DL_3_4
AND

CS3

AV_SIR > CS_SIR_DL_3_4

(CS3_BLER < CS_BLER_DL_3_4)

CS4

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

AV_RXQUAL_LT > CS_QUAL_DL_1_2 + CS_HST_DL_LT


OR

AV_RXQUAL_ST > CS_QUAL_DL_1_2 + CS_HST_DL_ST


AV_RXQUAL_LT > CS_QUAL_DL_2_3 + CS_HST_DL_LT
OR

AV_RXQUAL_ST > CS_QUAL_DL_2_3 + CS_HST_DL_ST


AV_SIR < CS_SIR_DL_3_4 + CS_SIR_HST_DL
(CS4_BLER > CS_BLER_DL_4_3)

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 As it has been observed (in the Alcatel labs during the B8 release validation) that some MS do not

report any interference measurements when the BCCH carrier is included in the frequency hopping
sequence of the allocated PDCH, the algorithm described above is slightly modified in the MR2 version
of the B8 release.

 A new triggering condition is used for the CS change between CS3 and CS4. This new triggering

condition shall be applied only to the TBF that do not report any interference level measurements.
Each time a Packet DL Ack/Nack message is received:
either it contains no interference measurements and the new algorithm is applied,
or it contains interference measurements and the standard algorithm is applied.

With the new algorithm, the interference level is replaced by the BLER (RLC BLock Error Rate):
the CS3 BLER is used for a CS change from CS3 to CS4,
the CS4 BLER is used for a CS change from CS4 to CS3.

 Remarks :

case of a DL TBF with PDCH allocated on the BCCH TRX and no frequency hopping on the BCCH
TRX : the MS does not report any interference level measurements in the Packet DL Ack/Nack
message (no interference measurements on the BCCH carrier),
case of a DL TBF with PDCH having the BCCH carrier belonging to the frequency hopping
sequence : depending on MS implementation, some MS may not report any interference
measurements (behavior observed in the Alcatel labs during the B8 release validation).

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 155

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.10 Link adaptation: DL GPRS Radio Link Control [cont.]


1 1 156

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 CS_HST_DL_LT and CS_HST_DL_ST are introduced to have hysteresis

mechanisms, to avoid ping-pong effects between coding schemes:


AV_RXQUAL_LT
7

CS1
CS_QUAL_DL_1_2 + CS_HST_DL_LT

CS1 or CS2 (hysteresis)

CS_QUAL_DL_1_2

CS2

CS_QUAL_DL_2_3 + CS_HST_DL_LT

CS2 or CS3 (hysteresis)

CS_QUAL_DL_2_3

CS3
0

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

CS_SIR_DL_4_3

CS3
or
CS4

CS4

CS_SIR_DL_3_4

C S_QUAL_DL_3_4

15

AV_SIR

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 The change from CS-3 to CS-4 is not only based on AV_RXQUAL_LT for the two following reasons:

RXQUAL range only goes down to 0.2%. However, the change of the coding scheme from CS-3 to CS-4
will probably have to be done for even lower values. Indeed, when the coding scheme is CS-4, in
static (AWGN), a BLER of 0.1 (typical value of the BLER threshold to change from CS-3 to CS-4) is
obtained for a raw BER of 1-(1-0.1)1/456 = 2.10-4. This raw BER would be larger in multipath
channels but is likely to remain below 0.2%. This means that CS_QUAL_DL_3_4 should be close to 0
and that a condition based on RXQUAL is not sufficient to change the coding scheme from CS-3 to CS4.
If the changes from CS-3 to CS-4 and from CS-4 to CS-3 are based on different metrics, a Ping-Pong
effect may occur. Indeed, it may happen that the conditions to change from CS-3 to CS-4 and CS-4 to
CS-3 are simultaneously true in some situations.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 156

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.11 Link adaptation: UL GPRS Radio Link Control


1 1 157

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

MS

It is based only on RXQUAL,


measured by the BTS
 Interference measurements
are not reported by the BTS
to the MFS
 AV_RXQUAL_ST (Short Term
average), AV_RXQUAL_LT (Long
Term average) are averaged
values of the RXQUAL received
from the BTS

BTS

MFS

UL RLC block (RXQUAL)

UL RLC block
RXQUAL
measurement
UL RLC block (RXQUAL)

Averaging

O&M threshold
and hysteresis

- AV_RXQUAL_ST
- AV_RXQUAL_LT
Link
adaptation
new CS

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 157

current CS

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.11 Link adaptation: UL GPRS Radio Link Control [cont.]


1 1 158

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Coding Scheme changing decision for uplink GPRS TBF:


Current
CS

CSi -> CSi+1

CSi -> CSi-1

CS1

AV_RXQUAL_LT < CS_QUAL_UL_1_2

CS2

AV_RXQUAL_LT < CS_QUAL_UL_2_3

AV_RXQUAL_LT > CS_QUAL_UL_1_2 + CS_HST_UL_LT


OR
AV_RXQUAL_ST > CS_QUAL_UL_1_2 + CS_HST_UL_ST

CS3

AV_RXQUAL_LT > CS_QUAL_UL_2_3 + CS_HST_UL_LT


AV_RXQUAL_LT < CS_QUAL_UL_3_4

OR
AV_RXQUAL_ST > CS_QUAL_UL_2_3 + CS_HST_UL_ST

CS4

AV_RXQUAL_LT > CS_QUAL_UL_3_4 + CS_HST_UL_LT


-

OR
AV_RXQUAL_ST > CS_QUAL_UL_3_4 + CS_HST_UL_ST

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 AV_RXQUAL_ST is a short term average whereas AV_RXQUAL_LT is a long term average. The short term

average is used to react quickly in case of fast degradation of the radio conditions.
X = FH or NFH: two thresholds are available for hopping and non-hopping TRXs.

Y = ACK or NACK: two thresholds are available for RLC acknowledged and unacknowledged modes.


The thresholds should be chosen so that:

CS_HST_UL_ST > CS_HST_UL_LT > 0

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 158

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.11 Link adaptation: UL GPRS Radio Link Control [cont.]


1 1 159

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 CS_HST_UL_LT and CS_HST_UL_ST are introduced to have

hysteresis mechanisms, to avoid ping-pong effects between coding


schemes:
AV_RXQUAL_LT
7

CS1

CS_QUAL_UL_1_2 + CS_HST_UL_LT

CS1 or CS2 (hysteresis)

CS_QUAL_UL_1_2

CS2

CS_QUAL_UL_2_3 + CS_HST_UL_LT

CS2 or CS3 (hysteresis)

CS_QUAL_UL_2_3

CS3

CS_QUAL_UL_3_4 + CS_HST_UL_LT

CS3 or CS4 (hysteresis)

CS_QUAL_UL_3_4

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

CS4
15

AV_SIR

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

In the uplink, the RXQUAL is available in CS-4 and the SIR measurements are not reported by the BTS to the
MFS so far. Therefore, it is possible to also use RXQUAL measurements to change the coding scheme from CS-3
to CS-4 or from CS-4 to CS-3, contrary to the downlink algorithm, where the SIR was used.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 159

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.12 Link adaptation in EGPRS: New metrics


1 1 160

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

Two new metrics are introduced in EGPRS, Mean_BEP (mean Bit error
Probability) and CV_BEP (Coefficient of Variation of BEP), to offset the fact
that RXQUAL, does not provide an accurate estimation of the bit error rate
of the radio channel
 BEP measured on burst basis, is a reflection of the current C/I, time dispersion

of the signal and the velocity of the terminal

MEAN_BEPblock =

1 4
BEPburst i
4 i=1

 The variation of BEP value over several bursts also provides additional

information regarding velocity and frequency hopping


CV_BEPblock =

1 4
1 4

BEPburst k BEPburst i

3 k =1
4 i=1

4
1
BEPburst i
4 i=1

 The mechanism is more efficient than in GPRS, since measurements are taken on

every burst and not only during the idle frames

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

For more details about MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP averages performed by the MS, refer to 3GPP 05.08.
Raw measurements on a radio block basis

For EGPRS (that is during an EGPRS DL TBF), the MS shall calculate the following values, for each radio block (1
radio block = 4 bursts) addressed to it (the DL TBF TFI contained in the radio block must be decoded) :
Mean Bit Error Probability (BEP) of a radio block:

MEAN _ BEPblock =

1 4
BEPburst i
4 i =1

Coefficient of variation of the Bit Error Probability of a radio block:

1 4
1 4

BEPburst k BEPburst i

3 k =1
4 i=1

CV _ BEPblock =
4
1
BEPburst i
4 i=1

In the above equations, the BEP is measured on a burst basis by the MS before channel decoding.
 Averaging of the raw measurements on a TS basis

The raw measurements made by the MS on a radio block basis are averaged by the MS per TS (TN in the below
equations) and per modulation type (GMSK (MCS1 to MCS4), 8-PSK (MCS5 to MCS9)) as follows:

with

xn
x
) MEAN_BEP_T
Nn1 + e n MEAN_BEP
block,n
Rn
Rn
x
x
CV_BEP_TN n = (1 e n ) CV_BEP_TN n 1 + e n CV_BEPblock,n
Rn
Rn

MEAN_BEP_T
Nn = (1 e

R n = (1 e) R n1 + e x n , R 1 = 0

(Rn gives the reliability of the averaged quality parameters)

 In the above equations :

n is the iteration index, incremented for each DL radio block,


e is a forgetting factor and is calculated according to the BEP_PERIOD cell parameter (new in B8, OMC-R
changeable),
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 160

SEE NEXT SLIDE

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.13 Link adaptation: DL EGPRS Radio Link Control


1 1 161

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The link adaptation is based in DL on Mean_BEP and CV_BEP

measurements reported by the MS in every EGPRS Packet DL Ack/Nack


message
 The MS can report 32 different Mean_BEP values (0..31) and 8 different

CV_BEP values (0..7), per modulation type

MS

Decision tables are different


depending on whether the
Incremental Redundancy
is activated or not

MFS
EGPRS Packet DL Ack/Nack
(Mean_BEP, CV_BEP)

IR
current CS

Link
adaptation

Average Power
Decrease in 8-PSK

link adaptation
tables

new CS

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 xn denotes the existence of quality parameters for the nth block, i.e. if the radio block is intended for this MS. xn values 1

and 0 denote the existence and absence of quality parameters, respectively


 Measurements reporting

A MS shall report the overall MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP (instead of reporting the RXQUAL and SIGN_VAR values) per
modulation type (that is GMSK_MEAN_BEP, GMSK_CV_BEP and/or 8-PSK_MEAN_BEP, 8-PSK_CV_BEP depending on the
received blocks since the last channel quality report sent to the network) averaged over all allocated channels
(timeslots) as follows:

MEAN_BEP
n =

R
j

(j)
n

(j)
MEAN_BEP_T
Nn

(j)

Rn

where n is the iteration index at reporting time and j the TS number.


The MS reports the Mean_BEP and CV_BEP values to the MFS in the Channel Quality Report included in the EGPRS
Packet DL Ack/Nack and Packet Resource Request messages.
The MS can report 32 different Mean_BEP values (MEAN_BEP_0 to MEAN_BEP_31). The mapping between the
calculated Mean_BEP value (linear scale) and the reported Mean_BEP value (logarithmic scale) depends on the used
modulation (two mapping tables are given in the 05.08 GSM recommendation : one for GMSK and one for 8-PSK).
The MS can report 8 different CV_BEP values (CV_BEP_0 to CV_BEP_7). The mapping between the calculated and
the reported values is identical for the GMSK and 8-PSK modulations.
 Measurements and reporting at BTS side

The BTS measures for each UL burst the BEP and calculates for each UL radio block (4 bursts) the Mean_BEP and the
CV_BEP = Std_BEP / Mean_BEP. The Mean_BEP and the CV_BEP are reported on a radio block basis by the BTS to the
MFS.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 161

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.13 Link adaptation: DL EGPRS Radio Link Control [cont.]


1 1 162

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

MS

In the UL, Mean_BEP and


CV_BEP are computed in
the BTS and sent to the
MFS, in each radio block

BTS

MFS

UL RLC block (CV_BEP, Mean_BEP)

UL RLC block
CV_BEP, Mean_BEP

The MFS averages Mean_BEP


and CV_BEP and then, a
decision can be taken on
the link adaptation

computation

UL RLC block (CV_BEP, Mean_BEP)

Averaging
IR
current CS

Link
adaptation
new CS

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 162

Average Power
Decrease in 8-PSK

link adaptation
tables

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.14 EGPRS Link Adaptation Decision


1 1 163

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The MFS verify if a MCS change is needed each time it receives new

MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP measurements, based on the following algorithm:


RLC Acknowledge Mode
YES

APD value

GMSK

GMSK tables

GMSK / 8-PSK

MCS 1..4
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning

NO

IR activated

APD value

8-PSK

GMSK

8-PSK tables

GMSK tables

MCS 5..9

MCS 1..4

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 163

GMSK / 8-PSK

8-PSK

8-PSK tables
MCS 5..9

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.15 TRX ranking/TRX transmission pool set-up


1 1 164

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

TRX ranking

 PS capable TRXs (TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) are

ranked at BSC side for PS traffic (from the


highest to the lowest), according to the following
criteria :






TRX supporting the BCCH, if PS_Pref_BCCH_TRX = 0


TRX capability (EGPRS capable High Power, then
EGPRS capable Medium Power and finally nonEGPRS capable)
Dual Rate capability (FR, then DR)
Size of the PDCH-group

 This ranking will be used in the reverse order for

CS traffic

TRX <--> TRE

TRX ranking
for PS traffic

TRX characteristics

ordered list of TRXs


for PS traffic

TRX transmission
pool set-up

TRX transmission pools

TRX <--> TRX transmission pool

TRX transmission pool set-up





A TRX transmission pool groups, together extra Abis nibbles for one TRX
The biggest TRX transmission pools are allocated to the TRXs having the highest
ranking for PS traffic.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

p.90 et p.91

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 164

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.15 TRX ranking/TRX transmission pool set-up [cont.]


1 1 165

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Example:

 5 TREs in a cell
 1 G4-HP TRE
 2 G4-MP TREs
 2 G3 TREs

 PS_Pref_BCCH_TRX = 0 (no specific preference)

 5 TRXs
 TRXa, TRXb, TRXc, TRXd: TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 (PS capable)
 TRXe: TRX_PREF_MARK > 0 (non PS capable)
 3 DR TRXs

 Pool types
 1 type 4
 1 type 2
 2 type 1

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

TREs

Dual Rate
usage

associated
TRXs

PS capable
TRX ranking

G4 - HP
G4 - MP
G4 - MP
G3
G3

FR
FR
DR
DR
DR

TRXa
TRXb
TRXc
TRXd
TRXe

1
2
3
4

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 165

associated
transmission
pool
type
type
type
type

4
2
1
1

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.16 TRX capability for PS traffic


1 1 166

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 TRX capabilities are determined at MFS side, taking into account:


 For GPRS: the max CS configured (MAX_GPRS_CS)

 For EGPRS:
 TRX type (n=1 to 5), received from BSC
- HW PS
 Hardware PS capability of each TRX, received from
capability
- TRX
the BSC
Max_GPRS_CS
type
 En_EGPRS (parameter to allow or not EGPRS in the
cell), received from the BSC
TRX GPRS
 Max_GPRS_CS (parameter which gives the highest
usable CS in the cell), received from the BSC
capability
 Max_EGPRS_MCS (parameter which gives the highest
usable MCS in the cell)
GPRS capability
(CS2/CS3/CS4)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

p.119

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 166

O&M

BSC
En_EGPRS

Max_EGPRS_MCS

TRX EGPRS
capability
EGPRS capability
(MCS 1-MCS 9)

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.17 Radio Resource Allocation: Overview


1 1 167

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 To offer high throughput to EGPRS MSs :

 EGPRS TBFs are preferentially allocated on high class TRXs

 Multiplexing, on the same PDCH, a DL EGPRS TBF with an UL GPRS TBF

has to be avoided, since in this case, the DL EGPRS is limited to GMSK


(i.e. MCS4)  new PDCH state: EGPRS

 To fairly share throughput between EGPRS TBFs:

 A higher number of EGPRS TBFs has to be piled up on high class TRXs

than on low class TRXs. This ratio has to take into account the maximum
throughput which can be offered by each class of TRX
 specific TRX selection for EGPRS TBFs

 To optimize GPRS throughput (i.e. high class TRX usage), as long as

it does not conflict with EGPRS traffic

 A new reallocation trigger (T4) is created in order to reallocate an UL

GPRS TBF which is multiplexed with a DL EGPRS TBF

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 167

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.18 Radio Resource Allocation: PDCH state


Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

!!! New states in B9 !!!

1 1 168

 All the following PDCH states are related to establish TBFs:


 Allocated : The PDCH is a slave PDCH, which has been indicated as usable

for PS traffic by the BSC


 Active : An allocated PDCH is active if it supports at least one radio
resource allocated for a TBF or for a RT PFC
 Full :

For GPRS TBF:


The number of established TBFs (GPRS + EGPRS TBFs) is equal to
MAX_UL/DL_TBF_SPDCH.
 For EGPRS TBF:
The number of established EGPRS TBFs is equal to MAX_UL/DL_TBF_SPDCH.


 EGPRS : SPDCH used in the DL direction by a 8-PSK capable EGPRS TBF.

This state is meaningful only for non-EGPRS capable MSs and only in the
UL direction.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

Full : for GPRS TBF : GPRS + EGPRS ts are counted, because some EGPRS TBF on GPRS PDCH are using GMSK
MCS.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 168

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.18 Radio Resource Allocation: PDCH state [cont.]


1 1 169

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 New state for GPRS PDCH

 PDCH used in DL direction by 8-PSK capable EGPRS TBF, i.e PDCH does

not belong to a class 1 TRX


 meaningful only
for non-EGPRS capable MS
 only in UL direction


 When meaningful, it overwrites active and busy states but not the

full state
 Avoids multiplexing of UL GPRS TBF and DL EGPRS TBF, in order
to not reduce the EGPRS throughput

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 169

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.18 Radio Resource Allocation: PDCH state [cont.]


1 1 170

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

DOWNLINK

UPLINK

MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH

MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH

Allocated Active

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

Full

Allocated Active

[EGPRS]

Full

[EGPRS]

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

One SPDCH has one state per direction (i.e., one state for the UL, one state for the DL). This state depends on the type of the MSs (EGPRS
capable or non-EGPRS capable) for which the radio resource (re)-allocation algorithm is called.





radio resource allocated to the MFS, but associated transmission resources are not allocated (i.e., the PDCH is not established).
All the following states are related to established PDCHs:
empty:

the PDCH is established, but no established TBF.

active:

For GPRS TBF: at least one established TBF and the number of established TBFs (GPRS + EGPRS) is smaller than
N_TBF_PER_SPDCH.

For EGPRS TBF: at least one established EGPRS TBF and the number of EGPRS TBFs (1) is smaller than N_TBF_PER_SPDCH.
busy:

For GPRS TBF: the number of established TBFs (GPRS and EGPRS TBFs) is greater or equal to N_TBF_PER_SPDCH, but smaller
than MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH/MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH.
For EGPRS TBF: the number of established EGPRS TBFs (1) is greater or equal to N_TBF_PER_SPDCH, but smaller than
MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH/MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH.
full:

For GPRS TBF: the number of established TBFs (GPRS + EGPRS TBFs) is equal to MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH/MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH.
For EGPRS TBF: the number of established EGPRS TBFs (3) is equal to MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH/MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH.
EGPRS (2)

PDCH used in the DL direction by an 8-PSK capable EGPRS TBF (i.e., the PDCH does not belong to a class 1 TRX).
This state is meaningful only for non-EGPRS capable MSs and only in the UL direction.





When meaningful, it overwrites active and busy states (but not the full state).

(1): Only EGPRS TBFs are taken into account to avoid to establish EGPRS TBFs on PDCHs with a low EGPRS capability, because of
GPRS TBFs.

(2): The aim of this new state is to avoid multiplexing UL GPRS TBF and DL EGPRS TBF, in order not to reduce EGPRS throughput.

(3): Only EGPRS TBFs are taken into account to avoid radio resource allocation failure because of the restricted list of EGPRS
capable TRXs.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 170

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.19 TRX selection for EGPRS TBFs


1 1 171

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Specific conditions are defined for TRX selection in case of

allocation or reallocation for EGPRS capable MS

 To allocate EGPRS TBFs preferentially on TRX which allows a high

throughput

 Principle:

 As long as the TRXs with the highest throughput do not support a

maximum number of EGPRS TBFs, the other EGPRS capable TRXs are not
taken into account by the algorithm

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 171

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.19 TRX selection for EGPRS TBFs [cont.]


1 1 172

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Following internal variables are defined:

 N_TRX_EGPRS : number of TRXs on which EGPRS MSs are served in EGPRS

mode
 MAX_TBF_PDCH_Current(TRXi) : maximum number of EGPRS TBFs per
PDCH, currently allocated in TRXi
 N_TBF_PDCH_MCSi_MCSj

It defines for each EGPRS TRX capability (MCSi) in the cell the number of
EGPRS TBFs per PDCH beyond which it becomes more interesting to serve
upcoming EGPRS MSs on TRXs with a lower EGPRS capability (MCSj).
 Max_PDCH_Throughput_MCSi / Max_PDCH_Throughput_MCSj
with Max_PDCH_Throughput_MCSx is the maximum theoretical throughput that
can be achieved at RLC/MAC per PDCH using MCSx encoding


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 172

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.19 TRX selection for EGPRS TBFs [cont.]


1 1 173

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 All the values between MCS2 and MCS9 are possible because of the

O&M parameter Max_EGPRS_MCS


 Different used thresholds :
EGPRS TRX capability
(MCSi)
MCS3
MCS4
MCS5
MCS6
MCS7
MCS8
MCS9

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

Immediately lower TRX


capability (MCSj)
MCS2
MCS2
MCS2
MCS5
MCS2
MCS6
MCS5
MCS2
MCS6
MCS5
MCS2
MCS8
MCS6
MCS5
MCS2

N_TBF_PDCH_MCSi_MCSj

1
1
2
1
2
1
2
4
1
2
4
1
2
2
5

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

N_TBF_PDCH_MCSi_MCSj are internal parameters which define for each EGPRS TRX capability, in the cell, the
number of EGPRS TBFs per PDCH beyond which it becomes more interesting to serve upcoming EGPRS MSs on
TRXs with a lower EGPRS capability.
This value depends on the throughput gap between 2 consecutive TRXs inside the ordered (according to TRX
Rank) list of EGPRS capable TRXs.
N_TBF_PDCH_MCSi_MCSj = Max_PDCH_Throughput_MCSi DIV Max_PDCH_Throughput_MCSj


Max_PDCH_Throughput_MCSx is the maximum theoretical throughput that can be achieved at RLC/MAC


per PDCH using MCSx encoding.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 173

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.19 TRX selection for EGPRS TBFs [cont.]


1 1 174

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Example

 Assuming that in a cell the following TRXs are EGPRS capable:


 TRXa: EGPRS capability = MCS9

 TRXb: EGPRS capability = MCS5


 TRXc: EGPRS capability = MCS5

 TRXd: EGPRS capability = MCS2


 TRXe: EGPRS capability = MCS2
 Two thresholds are used :

N_TBF_PDCH_MCS9_MCS5 = 2
 N_TBF_PDCH_MCS5_MCS2 = 2


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 174

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.19 TRX selection for EGPRS TBFs [cont.]


1 1 175

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

CELL START
MAX_TBF_PDCH_Current (TRXi) = 0
(with i = a, b, c, d or e )
MAX_TBF_PDCH_Current (TRXa)
< N_TBF_PDCH_MCS9_MCS5

TRXa
MAX_TBF_PDCH_Current (TRXa)
< N_TBF_PDCH_MCS9_MCS5

MAX_TBF_PDCH_Current (TRXa)
= N_TBF_PDCH_MCS9_MCS5
MAX_TBF_PDCH_Current (TRXb)
< N_TBF_PDCH_MCS5_MCS2 _
OR
MAX_TBF_PDCH_Current (TRXc)
< N_TBF_PDCH_MCS5_MCS2 _

TRXa, TRXb, TRXc


MAX_TBF_PDCH_Current (TRXb)
< N_TBF_PDCH_MCS5_MCS2 _
OR
MAX_TBF_PDCH_Current (TRXc)
< N_TBF_PDCH_MCS5_MCS2 _

MAX_TBF_PDCH_Current (TRXb)
= N_TBF_PDCH_MCS5_MCS2 _
AND
MAX_TBF_PDCH_Current (TRXc)
= N_TBF_PDCH_MCS5_MCS2 _

TRXa, TRXb, TRXc, TRXd, TRXe

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 175

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.20 Radio Resource Allocation: GPRS/EGPRS TBFs


Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

IMPORTANCE

HIGH

LOW

!!! New in B9 !!!

1 1 176

. If it is not a T3 reallocation  TRXs for which have already enough GCHs


established on the M-EGCH link

A.

Lowest number of PDCHs in the EGPRS state

B.

Highest available throughput in the direction of the bias

C.

Highest available throughput in the direction opposite to the bias

D.

TRX with the highest priority

E.

For EGPRS Best Effort TBFs establishments  Lowest number of GPRS


TBFs in the direction of the bias

F.

Combination with the PDCHs that have the lowest index.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 176

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.20 Radio Resource Allocation: EGPRS TBFs [cont.]


1 1 177

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

IMPORTANCE

HIGH

E) The candidate timeslot allocations which have the lowest number


of established EGPRS TBFs in the direction of the bias are preferred
 It is preferred to multiplex an EGPRS TBF with a GPRS TBF, rather
than with another EGPRS TBF
F) The candidate timeslot allocations which have the lowest number
of established EGPRS TBFs in the direction opposite to the bias are
preferred
G) The candidate timeslot allocations which are on a TRX with
highest priority are preferred
H) The candidate timeslot allocations which have the lowest number
of established GPRS TBFs in the direction of the bias are preferred
 H has a lowest priority than G, in order to avoid to establish
EGPRS TBFs on low class TRXs, because of GPRS TBFs

LOW

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 177

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.20 Radio Resource Allocation: EGPRS TBFs [cont.]


1 1 178

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

IMPORTANCE

HIGH

I) The candidate timeslot allocations which have all their PDCHs


established are preferred. If all the preferred best candidate
timeslot allocations require additional PDCHs, then a request is sent
to the BSC and the algorithm is stopped
J) If the MS has already one or 2 TBFs established, preference is
given to the candidate timeslot allocation which does not require a
T2 reallocation of the on-going TBFs
K) The candidate timeslot allocation with the PDCHs that have the
lowest index is preferred

LOW

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 178

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.21 Radio Resource Allocation: TBF Re-allocation


1 1 179

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 B8/B9 release: 4 types of TBF reallocations:


 T1: re-allocation to

maintain a TBF alive despite a pre-emption on a PACCH of a TBF


 or if MEGCH becomes too low to provide MAX MCS of the TBF [B9]


 T2: re-allocation of an on-going TBF when establishing a concurrent TBF




in order to provide a better throughput

In order to provide a higher throughput, if it is possible, to any TBF in the cell.

 T3: re-allocation to offer a better throughput to an on-going TBFs


 T4: re-allocation condition to move

UL GPRS TBF sharing one PDCH with a DL EGPRS TBF


  PDCHs which do not carry a DL EGPRS TBF


B9 : Same types as in B8, but extended possibilities

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

T2 : It is the case in the following scenarios:

- establishment of a downlink TBF, concurrent to an existing uplink TBF, which is


allocated in such a way that the maximum number of timeslots supported in the
direction of the bias cannot be offered to the MS.

- similar situation in case of uplink TBF establishment concurrent to a downlink TBF;

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 179

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.22 Radio Resource Allocation: Min_PDCH


1 1 180

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Min_PDCH: O&M parameter per cell

 Minimum number of PDCHs that are always allocated to the MFS.

 B8/B9 release: Min_PDCH takes into account:

 The pre-allocated SPDCH but not established (w/o GCH resource)

 The SPDCH pre-allocated and established for the fast initial (E)GPRS access
 The MPDCH represented by the parameter Nb_TS_MPDCH

 Thus, the initial allocation process takes into consideration:


 IF EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = 0 (false)


MIN_PDCH - Nb_TS_MPDCH SPDCH are requested to the BSC and pre-allocated


on the TRX with the highest priority

 IF EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = 1 (true)


MIN_PDCH - Nb_TS_MPDCH - 1 SPDCH are requested to the BSC and preallocated on the TRX with the highest priority

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 180

3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms

3.23 Radio Resource Allocation: Fast initial (E)GPRS access


1 1 181

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Also called : Immediate UL TBF establishment


 To provide always one established PDCH, usable for UL GPRS and UL

EGPRS TBFs, even if there is no PS traffic at all

 A TBF can be immediately established without requesting

transmission resource connection to the BSC

 EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS, parameter per cell

 flag to indicate whether or not one Slave PDCH for (E)GPRS traffic usage

will be statically established in the cell




Min: 0; Max: 1; Default 0

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 181

1 1 182

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

4 General (E)GPRS planning principels

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 182

4 General (E)GPRS planning principles

4.1 Throughput Dependency -> Interference (and Level)


1 1 183

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

Level of serving cell


Level (dBm)

C/I = 13 dB
C/I = 9 dB

Distance

CS-2

RL/MAC net
Data Throughput 12
(kbit/s) 10.8

Level of interfer cell

CS-1

8
7.2

Note: the throughput values are ETSI requirements, the C/I values are valid for TU3, SFH enabled

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

Neighbor cell not really, it is a cell using identical interfering frequencies.

Depending on C/I, CS2 wont provide the same tput (due to lost packets and retransmissions, the useful tput
decreases down to 10.8)
For instance MCS9 can vary from 45  59 kbps

If performing a planning with C/I > 12db : only MS with good C/I will get enough C/I to have max tput.

It is possible to link the C/I and RXLEV to simplify analysis (rxlev = f(C/I), depending on netwpork planning)

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 183

4 General (E)GPRS planning principles

4.2 Packet data throughput


1 1 184

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Packet data

throughput (ETSI)
 Maximum (error free

transmission) on Air
Interface

System Scheme Max RLC data throughput (RLC payload)


[kbps]
EGPRS

MCS-9
MCS-8
MCS-7
MCS-6
MCS-5
MCS-4
MCS-3
MCS-2
MCS-1

59.2
54.4
44.8
29.6
22.4
17.6
14.8
11.2
8.8

53.3
49.0
40.3
26.7
20.2
15.9
13.3
10.1
7.9

GPRS

CS-4
CS-3
CS-2
CS-1

20.0
14.4
12.0
8.0

18.0
13.0
10.8
7.2

 at BLER=10%

Degradation of RLC
by Level and
Interference

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

RLC data throughput


at Reference Point
(BLER=10%)
[kbps]

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

p.52 and p.64 of 3GPP 45.005


Type of

channel

Propagation conditions
TU3(no FH)

PDTCH/MCS-5 dB
PDTCH/MCS-6 dB
PDTCH/MCS-7 dB
PDTCH/MCS-8 dB
PDTCH/MCS-9 dB

TU3(ideal FH)

TU50(no FH)

TU50(ideal FH) RA250(no FH)

20

17

18

18

14.5

15.5

14.5

16

17.5

21

23.5

23.5

24

24.5

26.5**

30

32

33

35

28.5

29

30

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 184

30

4 General (E)GPRS planning principles

4.3 Reference performance point


1 1 185

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 ETSI -> Simulation of coding scheme performance under different

environment and fading conditions

 typical urban environment with mobile speed of 3 km/h (TU3)

 typical urban environment with mobile speed of 50 km/h (TU50)


 typical hilly terrain with mobile speed of 100 km/h (HT100)
 typical rural area with mobile speed of 250 km/h (RA250)

 The impact of Level and interference has been studied in order to

find the minimum required Level and C/I ratio for the reference
error performance, defined by a block error rate Block Error Rate
(BLER) of 10%, the reference performance point

 Why is this important?


 Saturation effect

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

For data, most users are static (TU3)

Japanese/Korean behaviour : they use data while in subways and trains. Appearing in France due to tv
online.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 185

4 General (E)GPRS planning principles

4.4 Saturation effect


1 1 186

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

kbit/s
20

CS1
CS2

The reference performance point is reached at BLER=10%


The following data rates can be achieved at this point:
CS-1: C/I=9 dB =>7.2 kbit/s (saturation: 8 kbit/s)
CS-2: C/I=13 dB =>10.8 kbit/s (saturation: 12 kbit/s)

16
12
8
4
0
3dB

7dB

11dB

15dB

19dB

23dB

27dB

Throughput curve as required by ETSI for CS-1and CS-2, typical urban environment with MS speed 3 km/h TU3 with SFH
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 186

C/I

4 General (E)GPRS planning principles

4.4 Saturation effect [cont.]


1 1 187

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 By increase of the C/I ratio

 Less retransmission has to be performed (less data blocks are


erroneous)

 since saturation occurs. e.g. for CS-1 starting with 7.2 kbit/s at a C/I

ratio of 9dB
 With an increasing C/I ratio the data throughput increases only little up
to its maximum value of 8kbit/s (saturation point)

 Data throughput increases

 Due to this saturation effect, a further increase of the C/I ratio does

not have large impact on the data throughput of a single coding


scheme: possibly a switch to a higher CS may occur (C/I ~ 7 dB for
CS-1 to CS-2)

 Reference Performance Point : A tradeoff between the

maximisation of the network throughput and excessive C/I


constraints.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 187

4 General (E)GPRS planning principles

4.5 Cell area and throughput


1 1 188

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

Level of serving cell

Level (dBm)

C/I = 13 dB

C/I = 9
dB

Level of neighbor-cell
Distance

CS-2
CS-1

RL/MAC net
Data Throughput
(kbit/s)

12
10.8
8
7.2

1. Throughput at CS-2 saturation point

4. Throughput at CS-1 reference performance point

2. Throughput at CS-2 reference performance point

3. Throughput at CS-1 saturation point

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 188

4 General (E)GPRS planning principles

4.6 Throughput <-> C/I


1 1 189

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 ETSI requirements and Alcatel values for C/Ico and C/Iadj for CS and GPRS

(PDCH) GSM 900 (Requirement for GMSK modulation: C/Iadj = C/Ico 18dB)
 In general: With higher coding scheme, higher C/I ratios required
 GPRS functionality more sensitive against interference

GSM 900

Circuit
switched

C/I cochannel
ETSI

C/I adjchannel ETSI


C/I cochannel
Alcatel

C/I adjchannel
Alcatel
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning

TU3

TU3
ideal FH

13

-9

Packet switched

CS1
TU50

TU50
ideal FH

TU3

TU3
ideal FH

10

15

-5

-9

-8

-9

11.5

6.7

7.5

-9

-13

-12

CS2
TU50

TU50
ideal FH

13

14

13

-3

-5

-4

-5

6.5

13.1

10.3

11.1

10.8

-13

-6

-8.8

-8.2

-9

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

Ideal FH : hopping on 4 or more frequencies with at least 800kHz separation between each channel offers
the "ideal FH" diversity gain (4 to 5 dB)

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 189

4 General (E)GPRS planning principles

4.6 Throughput <-> C/I [cont.]


1 1 190

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

18
16

CS4
CS3
CS2
CS1

13Jul2000 09:45:44

14

Throughput

Parameters :
 GPRS
 C/I Throughput
 Co-channel
Interferer
 TU 50
 no FH

TU50 (900 MHz) no fh


20

12
10
8
6
4
2
0
5

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

10
15
C / I c o [dB]

20

25

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

CS4 can't resist to interference, even with high C/I, it doesn't reach the saturation point. Expect high
retransmission % when using CS4.

For each C/I, a typical tput can be expected. CS adaptation gives flexibility in case of radio conditions
changes.
At start of a session, which CS to choose?
How would the curve looks like if TU3 was used ? (C/I scale would be squeezed)

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 190

30

1 1 191

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 191

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.1 GPRS network planning


1 1 192

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Two different cases are possible to introduce GPRS service:


 GPRS Greenfield planning means




Dedicated analysis of GPRS network design

All GPRS cells will be designed for maximum throughput performances

So the (GPRS) cell ranges could be smaller as used to be in a pure GSM


network, designed for speech service only

 Introduction of GPRS in operating GSM cells





GPRS performance is strongly depending on GSM network quality


Cell ranges are depending from GSM service planning

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 192

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.2 GPRS Greenfield planning


1 1 193

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

Traffic Analysis
Field strength prediction
Mutual interference calculation
GSM/GPRS frequency planning
Cell specific interference calculation
TRX assignment to GPRS service

GPRS Throughput Analysis


RA Planning + CAE Data

Measures to reach GPRS QoS


GPRS features
GSM features

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

Objectives

 Traffic Analysis

PS Traffic

User Profile

Market applications

Customer questionnaire
Traffic model: Example

GPRS traffic calculation


- Straight forward
- Erlang C

- Traffic tool

- Exemplary results of the 3 traffic calculation methods

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 193

GPRS traffic calculation


1 1 194

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Traffic Analysis
 PS Traffic

 User Profile

 User Behavior

 Market applications

 Customer questionnaire

Different traffic calculation


procedure for packet traffic
compared to speech traffic
calculation

 Traffic model: Example

 GPRS traffic calculation

Straight forward
 Erlang C
 Traffic tool


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 194

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.3 GPRS traffic calculation and traffic analysis


1 1 195

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The traffic analysis is done to have the amount of resources

(frequencies) one needs to carry GSM+GPRS traffic

 CS traffic demand (Circuit Switched, derived from Erlang B formula)


 PS (Packet Switched) traffic demand has also to be taken into account

for the capacity calculation




What is PS or GPRS traffic?

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 195

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.4 GPRS traffic calculation and PS traffic


1 1 196

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The PS traffic demand (or user throughput demand) is derived from

an average traffic data volume generated by each type of GPRS


subscriber
 GPRS traffic volume is given on a monthly basis as sum of used

applications data volume.

 Today all PS traffic values are based on assumptions until useful

experience values are available


 The traffic values are collected in a traffic model
 In general, the traffic from PS services is depending on:
 User profile

 User behavior

 Market applications and service distributions

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

User profile : what kind of applications ? which volumes ?


User behaviour : what time ? how long ? where ?

Market applications : what is proposed to customers : video on demand ? Live tv ? Mmp games ?

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 196

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.4 GPRS traffic calculation and PS traffic [cont.]


1 1 197

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

U s e r p ro file

U s e r b e h a v io r

M a r k e t a p p lic a tio n s

C u s to m e r
Q u e s tio n n a ire

a n d s e rv ic e d is trib u tio n s

T ra ffic m o d e l

T ra ffic c a lc u la tio n

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 197

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.5 GPRS traffic calculation and user profile


1 1 198

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 A user profile defines a typical user for packet data services, using a

certain amount of applications

 It is useful to limit the amount of user profiles to keep the calculation

simple, e.g. two profiles can be introduced, business and private user

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 198

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.6 GPRS traffic calculation and market applications


1 1 199

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Market applications

 Different services are possible for packet data use e.g. new designed




services or services known from the fixed network


Market applications and user profiles are related to each other, thus
some applications are assigned to one user profile only
Each service is characterized by its occurrence: action time per month
and the related bit rate per action.
In some applications, the data exchange traffic is oriented to downlink,
in some others to uplink. Generally the downlink traffic is preponderant
in asymmetrical applications such as: web browsing, information
downloading, audio downloading etc.
This shall be taken into account for the dimensioning process: so the
dimensioning will be downlink oriented.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

Difference between prepaid and postpaid ?


Daily services : weather forecast, news
Hourly : road traffic, market shares

Uplink bias applications : MMS, ftp upload. Create problem for dimesionning ? No, because MMS are
uploaded and then downloaded. They create equal traffic in both ways.
Current Ms use 2ts in uplink, class 11 and 12 are coming (up to 4 TS in uplink, but still simplex.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 199

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.7 GPRS traffic calculation and user behavior


1 1 200

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Important for the user behavior is the daily distribution

 Duration and occurrence time of busy hour (BH), assumption busy hour is

same for CS and PS


 The user distribution over the planning area

 Following definitions can be only expected values for the

introduction of GPRS (homogeneous traffic distribution over the cell


area is assumed)
 GPRS subscriber percentage (%), related to the total (CS+PD) subscriber

number
 GPRS user profiles percentage (%), related to the total GPRS subscriber
number
 Geographical percentage distribution (%) of GPRS user profiles related to
morphostructure
 Daily GPRS user profile activity (days/month)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

Core network : can provide statistics per user (pdp context activation, gprs attach, APN usage, etc)
Which interface : Gb (mfs-sgsn) , Gn (sgsn-ggsn)
Special tools : astelia

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 200

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.8 Customer questionnaire


1 1 201

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Customer questionnaire

 Data collection from Operator -> Forecast data

 To keep process simple -> 12 Points questionnaire

1. Total amount of GSM subscribers in the network (CS+PS subscribers)


2. Blocking at air interface (speech)
3. Speech traffic per subscriber (mErl/sub)
4. Distribution of CS subscribers to different morpho classes

5. Percentage of GPRS subscribers related to the total amount of GSM


subscribers
6. Busy hour occurrence for speech traffic and packet data traffic

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

This questions are asked to the operator

Speech traffic : from 10mErl to 25 mErl (depends on network age and area covered)
6. Busy hour mix (BHM) : at busy hour, split of different types of traffic

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 201

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.8 Customer questionnaire [cont.]


1 1 202

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

7. User profile definition


8. Market applications definition and relation to user profiles
9. PS user behaviour/distribution:




daily GPRS user profile activity (days/month)

GPRS user profiles percentage (%), related to the total GPRS subscriber number
geographical percentage distribution (%) of GPRS user profiles related to
morphostructure

10. Number of BTS in the existing network

11. Distribution of existing BTS to morphoclasses

12. Number of TRX/BTS, in accordance to morphoclass

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 202

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.9 Traffic Model (Example)


1 1 203

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

The table summarizes the assumptions

made for the traffic profiles of GPRS


subscribers

 (days/month): business 22 days, private 30


 Total GPRS Users 7%: 2% private and 5 %

business

User Profile
Market Application

Update/Month

E-mail+Attachment

mail/Month

WWW

Information (e.g.
Location, event,
transportation services)
e-Commerce
(e.g. On-line shopping)

Audio (MP3)
e.g. (Access audio files on
the net)
TOTAL
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 203

Private

during GPRS ntroduction

Remote access (e.g. WEB


data bases general and
specific (law, medicine,
...)

 urban = 70% business, 50% private


 rural = 30% business, 50% private

Business

Kbytes

Mbytes/Month
Kbytes

Mbytes/Month
Pages/Month

Kbytes

Mbytes/Month
info/Month
Kbytes

Mbytes/Month
usage/Month
Kbytes

Mbytes/Month
Min/Month

Kbytes/Min

Mbytes/Month
Mbytes/Month

20

0.117
24

150

30

3.516

0.0878

100

100

25

2.441
25
60

10

0.977
20
60

1.464

1.17

75

75

0.586

0.146

1024

8.124

2.380

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.10 User mapping


1 1 204

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 User mapping and Multi-service mapping

 GOAL : to categorize the quality of the three calculation methods

 User mapping

 One certain resource can be shared simultaneously by different users.

Behavior in GPRS -> Packet switched service for different users on one
timeslot.
User
User 3
User 2
User 1

Timeslot
1

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

TS 2

TS 3

TS 4

TS 5

TS 6

TS 7

TS 8

TRX

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

In dimensionning, never take maximum usage as an average value!

User mapping should be quite low, in order to allow a high throughput  but requires higher capacity

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 204

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.11 Multi-Service
1 1 205

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Multi-Service with GPRS

 One user can use different services. So one user is not directly

mapped to only one service in the traffic model examination

S e r v ic e 2

e .g . F T P
S e r v ic e 1

S e r v ic e 3

e .g . H T T P

e .g . W A P
U se r

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

Typical http "surfing" usage : 10kB/s (average on 1 hour)

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 205

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.12 QoS per User Application


1 1 206

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 QoS per User Application Volume@BH


 Page size

 Queue Delay


Acceptable delay if no resource is available at service attempt

Specific elements in the range of a variety X are called quantiles

 Quantile
 Bit rate

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

Queue delay : how long a user can wait before disconnecting ? Usually for data, user can wait up to 30s.
Quantile : percentage of throughputs measures that are within a certain range (to check)  STANDARD
DEVIATION !!

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 206

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.13 GPRS traffic calculation


1 1 207

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 3 different calculations can be used for GPRS traffic calculation


 Straight forward
 Erlang C

 Traffic tool

User mapping

QoS per service

Straight Forward result


for PS

Multi-service
mapping

Erlang C for PS

Traffic Model

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 207

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.13 GPRS traffic calculation [cont.]


1 1 208

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The straightforward calculation

 gives the smallest number of needed PS TS among the traffic calculation








methods
It calculates for the whole data volume, sum of all users data, the
number of PDCH TS needed to transfer this data volume, regardless of
data transfer peaks
This method is not taking into account parallel data transfer, which is
the benefit of packet transfer (GPRS).
So no service attempt queuing and no service multiplexing is taken into
account by this method.
A calculation method to get in the first step of GPRS planning an idea of
minimum needed PDCH TS.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 208

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.13 GPRS traffic calculation [cont.]


1 1 209

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Erlang C calculation

 gives for a required service attempt probability (Quantile) and the queue




delay time of it (e.g. 2 s delay can be set if no resource is available at


service attempt), the number of needed resources (TS).
The result of Erlang C will give the biggest number of needed PDCH TS
among the presented packet traffic calculations.
The reason is that a constant data flow is considered which is not the
case for different applications like WAP
For all different services the PDCH TS with Erlang C has to be calculated
and summarized. Afterwards the sum of PDCH TS for the different
services leads to an over dimensioning.
This method can be used to give very fast a planning result on how many
PDCH as maximum can be expected.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 209

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.13 GPRS traffic calculation [cont.]


1 1 210

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Traffic Model from Alcatel

 The traffic tool is the most exact method to calculate the needed PDCH

compared to the above calculation methods

Traffic tool is an automated tool (processed by Alcatel-Lucent only)


 Result of this calculation will be most probably between the above calculation
methods


 Additionally operator agreed/suggested handling of GPRS channels must

be fixed. This is for example the usage of:

Activation of MPDCH or not


BCCH combined mode or not
 Usage of Delayed DL TBF Release or not
 QUALITY OF SERVICES [Volume @BH, Page size (KBytes), Queue delay
(seconds), Quantile (%), Bit rate (kbit/s)]



EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 210

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.13 GPRS traffic calculation [cont.]


1 1 211

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Traffic Model from Alcatel

 The traffic tool can calculate the result:





TS needed for CS traffic and signaling in DL/UL


TS needed PS traffic and signaling in DL/UL

 TRX calculation for CS and PS with application of reuse of CS TS for PDCH

(PS) when dynamic/smooth PDCH adaptation and /or fast preemption


feature is activated

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 211

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.14 Exemplary results of the 3 traffic calculation methods


1 1 212

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 General Input data for all 3 calculation methods


 GPRS users (Packet Switched Service)=600 per cell

WAP users: 60
WEB users: 180
 MMS users: 360



 Service data size per user in busy hour (per 3600s)

WAP data size per user 12KB


 WEB data size per user 40KB
 MMS data size per user 40KB


 Coding Scheme : CS-2

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 212

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.14 Exemplary results of the 3 traffic calculation methods [cont.]


1 1 213

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Straight Forward calculation for GPRS Traffic


 Needed transfer rate per service for all users
 WAP
 WEB
 MMS

12KB x 8bit/3600s x 60 users


40KB x 8bit/3600s x 180 users
40KB x 8bit/3600s x 360 users

= 1.6 kbit/s
= 16 kbit/s
= 32 kbit/s

 Total number of needed PDCH's

 Sum of data rate for all services: 49.6 kbit/s

 Expected transfer rate per Timeslot (PDCH)= 10 kbit/s in good radio

conditions

Total needed PDCH = 5 PDCH TS / cell


(= 49.6 kbps / 10 kbps)
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

But assumption is : all users can bare to wait for 3600 sec to finish their download

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 213

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.14 Exemplary results of the 3 traffic calculation methods [cont.]


1 1 214

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Erlang C GPRS traffic calculation


 QoS per service

 WAP service: bit rate = 5 kbit/s for 90% Quantile and 2s queue delay

 WEB service: bit rate = 30 kbit/s for 90% Quantile and 2s queue delay
 MMS service: bit rate = 30 kbit/s for 90% Quantile and 2s queue delay

 Number of needed PDCH per service

 The following results calculation can be done with an Erlang C tool. The

results are listed for each service




in this example here for WAP, WEB and MMS

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 214

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.14 Exemplary results of the 3 traffic calculation methods [cont.]


1 1 215

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

9 0 .0 %

MU =

RO =

9 0 .0 %

30

1 .8 7 5 0

Total number of needed PDCH = 10 PDCH TS

Assumption: Expected rate per TS of 10 kbit/s


For the WAP service 1 resource of 5 kbit/s is needed = 1 PDCH TS
 For the WEB service 1 resource of 30 kbit/s is needed = 3 PDCH TS
 For the MMS service 2 resources of 30 kbit/s is needed = 6 PDCH TS



EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 215

Bit rate

Quantile

Queue delay (s)

Subscribers

2 s

1 .8 7 5 0

Bit rate

2 s

Quantile

Queue delay (s)

PDCH =

180

0 .5 3 3 3

360

1 .0 6 6 7

MU =

Subscribers

PDCH =

RO =

Page size (Kbytes)

40

4 0R L A N G
2
E
C

Volume@BH

WEB

ER LAN G C
Page size (Kbytes)

WAP

MMS
Volume@BH

 Erlang C GPRS traffic calculation

30

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.14 Exemplary results of the 3 traffic calculation methods [cont.]


1 1 216

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 TRAFFIC TOOL version 1.0

 Results of the traffic tool is:

6 PDCH TS / cell needed


to cope with GPRS traffic
per cell
 Used settings in the traffic tool:

 No activation of: Combined mode, DL Delayed TBF Release and MPDCH


 Call Mix Reference used is: Alcatel B7 reference

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 216

5 (E)GPRS Network introduction

5.15 GPRS traffic calculation result


1 1 217

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 General GPRS traffic calculation result:


 Needed amount of timeslots for PS traffic


makes it possible to go to the next step of GPRS network design process

 The user throughput demand is then related to a daily traffic occurrence

(user capacity)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 217

1 1 218

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

6 (E)GPRS Network design

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 218

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.1 General

1 1 219

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 With the input from GPRS traffic calculation the GPRS Design

process can start:

 Basis: The knowledge of the amount of timeslots makes it possible to go

to the next step of GPRS network design process

 The user throughput demand is then related to a daily traffic occurrence

(user capacity) and in combination with the CS traffic demand, the


needed equipment amount is calculated:

Number of timeslots which may be reserved for GPRS in normal and high load
state of the BSC
 Number of timeslots which have to be reserved exclusively for GPRS
 Number of remaining timeslots for CS traffic
=> Standard BTS configuration


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 219

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.1 General [cont.]


1 1 220

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

Standard BTS configuration

The result of traffic analysis gives the standard BTS configuration for
the different traffic areas. The traffic areas are most commonly linked
to a specific morpho class

Next steps:

1. GPRS Field strength prediction is done as for the GSM network planning

[A9155]

2.  Inputs for mutual interference calculation [A9155]


3.  Inputs for a GSM/GPRS frequency planning [A9155/AFP module]

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 220

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.1 General [cont.]


1 1 221

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Cell specific interference calculation


 It is done with the results of the GSM/GPRS frequency planning.
 The cell specific interference calculation will be used to identify less

interfered frequencies for TRX assignment.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 221

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.2 Frequency planning


1 1 222

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Mostly all GPRS networks will be INTERFERENCE limited


 Therefore:

 Proper Frequency Re-use

 Introduction of Frequency hopping [FH doesn't bring better throughput in

GPRS and E-GPRS while using high CS & MCS]


 What is the best Carrier for GPRS - BCCH or TCH?
 Make use of improvement strategies
 site


design changes

e.g. antenna changes, electrical down tilt

 site

lowering
 site densification
 network expansion/enhancement strategies (like Dual Band)
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

Interference limited = C/I limited.

Needs an higher C/I to ensure better tput. Redo a frequency planning with greater constraints on C/I
Best carrier = the carrier with the less interference  BCCH ? Normally, yes.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 222

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.2 Frequency planning [cont.]


1 1 223

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 BCCH

 no DTX, PC (Power Control) or FH (Frequency Hopping)

 C/I of minimum 11.5 dB is recommended (Alcatel values)


 Disadvantage: only 6 TS available for GPRS

 TCH

 Hopping, (PC)

 all 8 TS available for GPRS

 Disadvantage: by hopping -> Interference is RF_load dependent




the increase of RF_load implies a decrease of C/I and therefore of the


throughput

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 223

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.3 Throughput
1 1 224

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Throughput -> directly related to link quality and level

 Due to this dependency, the shape of a cell is related to the

throughput
 GPRS cells are designed in respect to the
 desired data transmission (throughput)

 behavior of the customers in the planned area

 Attention: GPRS service more sensitive against interference and

level than CS service

 Therefore GPRS designed cells are smaller than CS designed ones

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 224

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.4 Link budget


1 1 225

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 In general, the link budget calculation is the same like for CS design
 Attention has to be paid to the hardware related values:


BTS/MS performance -> Supplier dependent

 BTS output power & receiver sensitivity according to the coding scheme
 MS output power & receiver sensitivity according to the coding scheme

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 225

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.4 Link budget [cont.]


1 1 226

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Some differences compared to the well-known power budget is the

handling of some losses and margins:

 body loss, for PS: 2 dB, due to the fact, that for the most PS applications

the MS is not close to the body , but on an other, from the propagation
point of view unfavorable position (e.g. on the table)
 interference margin: minimum 3 dB (urban and dense urban area up to 5
dB, depending of the frequency re-use), due to the high dependency of
the PS service on C/I
 (lognormal) fading margin can be added to increase the coverage
probability from 50% up to 95%; e.g. assuming standard deviation sigma =
7 dB =>fading margin:1.65 sigma ~11 dB

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 226

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.4 Link budget [cont.]


1 1 227

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

TX
Internal Power:
Isol.,Comb.,Filter Loss:
Output Power
Cable,Connectors
Loss:
Body Loss:
Antenna Gain:
Eff. Isotr. Rad. Power:

Circuit switched mode

CS1 (TU 50)

Uplink
33.00 dBm
0.00 dB
33.00 dBm
0.00 dB

Downlink
45.44 dBm
5.01 dB
40.39 dBm
3.00 dB

Uplink
33.00 dBm
0.00 dB
33.00 dBm
0.00 dB

Downlink
45.44 dBm
5.05dB
40.39 dBm
3.00 dB

Uplink
33.00 dBm
0.00 dB
33.00 dBm
0.00 dB

Downlink
45.44 dBm
5.05dB
40.39 dBm
3.00 dB

3.00 dB
0.00 dBi
30.00 dBm

0.0 dB
18.00 dBi
55.43 dBm

2.00 dB
0.00 dBi
31.00 dBm

0.00 dB
18.00 dBi
55.43 dBm

2.00 dB
0.00 dBi
31.00 dBm

0.00 dB
18.00 dBi
55.43 dBm

Uplink
-111.00
dBm
0.00 dB
3.00 dB

Downlink
-102.00
dBm
3.00 dB
0.00 dB

Uplink
-109.00
dBm
0.00 dB
3.00 dB

Downlink
-102.00
dBm
2.00 dB
0.00 dB

Uplink
-105.00
dBm
0.00 dB
3.00 dB

Downlink
-98.00 dBm

18.00 dBi
3.00 dB
3.00 dB
0.0 dB
-126.00
dBm

0.00 dBi
0.00 dB
3.00 dB
0.0 dB
-96.00
dBm

18.00 dBi
3.00 dB
3.00 dB
0.0 dB
-124.00
dBm

0.00 dBi
0.00 dB
3.00 dB
0.0 dB
-97.00
dBm

18.00 dBi
3.00 dB
3.00 dB
0.0 dB
-120.00 dBm

0.00 dBi
0.00 dB
3.00 dB
0.0 dB
-93.00 dBm

RX
Rec. Sensitivity:
Body Loss:
Cables, Connectors
Loss:
Antenna Gain:
Diversity Gain:
Interference Margin
Fading Margin
Isotr. Rec. Power:

Balance

Max. Path loss

Uplink
156 dB

Downlink
151.43 dB

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

Uplink
155 dB

CS2 (TU 50)

Downlink
152.43 dB

Uplink
151 dB

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

Path loss difference = 3dB standard, 5dB alcatel standard


Uplink Rx sensitivity depends on CS being used.
p. 92 radio network planning aspects

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 227

2.00 dB
0.00 dB

Downlink
148.43 dB

GPRS link budget


example,
dimensioned for
the Evolium BTS
(without TRE):
Evolium/900, 3x4
configuration, 1
X-Pol
Antenna/sector,
in comparison to
a CS link budget

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.5 Interference analysis on BCCH frequencies


1 1 228

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

Network wide C/I (BCCH)

Legend (dB)
> 25 dB

> 16 dB
> 13 dB
> 9 dB
< 9 dB

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 228

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.6 Interference analysis on TCH frequencies


1 1 229

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

Network wide C/I (worst TCH)

C/I reduction

Legend (dB)
> 25 dB

> 16 dB
> 13 dB
> 9 dB
< 9 dB

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 229

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.7 TRX assignment to GPRS service


1 1 230

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Some general considerations apply independently from the BSS

software release:

 GPRS/EDGE shall be mapped on the TRX(s) with the best radio quality

(lowest interference probability); this can be any TRX in the cell.

Identification of less interfered frequencies and their ranking


Assigning the preference for PS traffic handling to the best ranked frequencies
(e.g High Power TRX, Full rate capable TRX) with the help of the parameters:
TRX_PREF_MARK; PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX, TRX Classes,
 Since B7 up to 16 TRX per cell are available for GPRS service. So a
differentiation of GSM and GPRS TS allocation priority on the TRX must be
fixed during planning. The allocation priority for GPRS shall be set according to
GPRS QoS needs.



EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

How to map TRE with TRX ?

PS capable TRXs have to be preferentially mapped (from the best choice to the worst) on:
- FR, HP, EGPRS capable TREs

- DR, HP, EGPRS capable TREs


- FR, MP, EGPRS capable TREs

- DR, MP, EGPRS capable TREs


- FR, non-EGPRS capable TREs

- DR, non-EGPRS capable TREs

(When PS_Pref_BCCH_TRX = TRUE, the TRX supporting the BCCH is mapped on the best TRE)

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 230

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.8 GPRS Analysis


1 1 231

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 GPRS coverage analysis

 What area is covered with what coding scheme?


 Area and average throughput distribution

 Environment definition (Example)


 TU 50

 GSM 900 Band

 BCCH as GPRS carrier

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 231

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.8 GPRS Analysis [cont.]


1 1 232

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 GPRS analysis Steps:


 C/I based analysis
 Coding

scheme
 Throughput

Analysis in respect to:

 Average throughput or/and


 throughout hot spots

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 232

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.8 GPRS Analysis [cont.]


1 1 233

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 GPRS service is C/I limited


 Improvements for a larger

CS-4 coverage

Network wide Coding Scheme


Distribution (C/I based)

-> reduction of the overall


interference situation in the
network (higher achievable
throughput)

Legend (CS value)


CS 4

CS 3
CS 2
CS 1

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 233

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.8 GPRS Analysis [cont.]


1 1 234

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The system keeps always the

highest coding scheme (and


due to this, the highest
achievable throughput), until
the C/I proportions lead to
change to a lower coding
scheme
 By driving through the CS4
area from the center
to the border, a
stepwise degradation
Legend (kbit/s)
of the throughput depending
19..20 kbit/s
from the
16..18 kbit/s
C/I ratio is visible
14..15 kbit/s

Network wide GPRS Throughput


(C/I based)

7..13 kbit/s
< 7 kbit/s

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 234

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.9 LA and RA planning


1 1 235

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Routing Area (RA) Definition

 CS case with a mobile terminating call:


 the

MS in idle mode will be paged in all cells belonging to the LA


where the MS is assigned. The signalling effort for paging is thus
focused to a certain area, the LA.
 GPRS: the SGSN pages the MS in STANDBY state, in case of a downlink
TBF (comparable to a CS MT call).
 Paging GSM+ paging GPRS additional signalling effort will be produced in
the network
 ETSI introduced Routing Areas (RA), which are smaller than LA.
 The signalling effort for paging is now more focused to a smaller area.
Since not all cells of a LA are involved in the paging process, the
signalling load for the cells is reduced

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 235

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.9 LA and RA planning [cont.]


1 1 236

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Routing Area (RA)

 A Routing Area is a sub-set of one LA and identifies one or several cells in

a location area.
 The location of a MS in STANDBY state is known in the SGSN on a RA
level.

 Each cell in a network is now (additionally to CI and LAC)

characterized by:

 Routing Area Code (RA_code)


 RA_Colour

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

range 0255
range 07

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

In SI3, if RA COLOUR = -1 : no gprs in the cell

Allows the mobile to quickly check if change of RA : ra colour change (because SI3 update frequent)

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 236

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.9 LA and RA planning [cont.]


1 1 237

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Routing Area (RA)


 RA information is sent to MS on BCCH by
 RA_Colour (SI 3 and 4)

 RA_Code (SI 13, less often )

 RA_Colour indicates the MS:

 if GPRS is supported in the cell (if -1)

 the fast identification of the RA membership of the serving cell and

neighbour cells (what cell belongs to what RA)

 As a consequence, the assignment of the cells belonging to RA has to

be done carefully, to avoid additional signaling load on the cell


(additional to the signaling for the CS traffic too)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

Mapping of BCCH data in 3GPP 45.002 (6.3.1.3)


SI3 : twice in 1.9s
SI4 : twice in 1.9s

SI 13 : once in 1.9s

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 237

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.9 LA and RA planning [cont.]


1 1 238

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 LA planning

 in accordance to the common rules for CS planning, no extra adaptation

(e.g. on the neighbour list) has to be made for PS services

 RA planning

 follows in general the rules of the common LA assignment, e.g. avoid

roads with fast moving traffic through RA

 The RA planning consists of:

 assignment of each cell to a RA

 assignment of the RA_Code to each RA


 assignment of a RA_Colour to each RA

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

Routing area code can be, ie, LAC+0,1,2,3...

Routing area color : shouldn't be the same between two areas that are next to each other

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 238

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.9 LA and RA planning [cont.]


1 1 239

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The following rules are mandatory:


 256 possible RA_Code (0..255)

 8 possible RA_Colour_Code (0..7)

 one RA must belong to only one LA, it is not possible to define a RA









across a LA border (e.g. 1 cell from LA1 and 2 cells from LA2)
a RA can contain one or several cells
one cell can not belong to two RA
cells from one BTS can be allocated to different RA
the maximum number of RA in a LA is 256
it is possible to reuse the RA_Colour in a LA
two adjacent RA in a LA must have different RA_Colour

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 239

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.9 LA and RA planning [cont.]


1 1 240

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 For the dimensioning of the number of RA in a LA, of the number of

cells belonging to a RA and the number of RA_Codes per LA, the


following steps are proposed, function of different network growths
 Step 1: Network with low GPRS/E-GPRS traffic
 RA as big as LA =>1 RA_Code (same for each cell) per LA, 1 RA_colour

(same for each cell) per LA


 The first introduction step is based on the assumption, that in the
beginning not much PS services is expected. The expense of this
implementation is low

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 240

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.9 LA and RA planning [cont.]


1 1 241

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Step 2: Network with medium GPRS/E-GPRS traffic


 The LA is split into maximum 8 RA

 For each RA in a LA one unique RA_Code is assigned

 A balanced number of cells per RA needs to be acquired, however for

identified hot spots an unbalanced assignment is possible (smaller RA for


hot spots)
 This step represents a reasonable split of the LA into RA if packet data
traffic rises
 It can also be carried out right from the start to be prepared for the
traffic growth
 The planning effort is medium

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 241

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.9 LA and RA planning [cont.]


1 1 242

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Step 2: Network with medium GPRS/E-GPRS traffic


 The LA is split into maximum 8 RA

RA 1

RA 2

RA 3

RA_C: 0

RA_C: 1

RA_C: 2

RA 4

RA 5

RA 6

RA_C: 3

RA_C: 4

RA_C: 5

RA 7
RA_C: 6

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

RA 8
RA_C: 7

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 242

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.9 LA and RA planning [cont.]


1 1 243

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Step 3: Network with high packet data traffic or dense network


 LA = up to n RA (max 256)

 If the number of RA in a LA is larger than 9, the RA_Colour reuse is

necessary, and a large-scale careful planning is recommended


 As described before, frequent RA change by cell-reselection is not
desired =>thus the RA should be not to small
 by reusing the RA_Colour, adjacencies of RA's with the same RA_Colour
have to be avoided

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 243

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.9 LA and RA planning [cont.]


1 1 244

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Step 3: Network with high packet data traffic or dense network


 LA = up to n RA (max 256)

RA 1

RA 2

RA 3

RA_C: 0

RA_C: 1

RA_C: 2

RA 4

RA 5

RA 6

RA_C: 3

RA_C: 4

RA_C: 5

RA 8

RA 9

RA_C: 6

RA_C: 7

RA_C: 0

RA 10

RA 11

RA 12

RA_C: 1

RA_C: 2

RA_C: 3

RA 7

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 244

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.10 Quality of Service


1 1 245

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 GPRS QoS is not an isolated

topic
 It is necessary to use GSM
counters in order to
complete the analysis of :

GSM QoS
Impact of GSM on GPRS

 GPRS QoS

 the impact of GPRS on GSM

QoS


GPRS QoS

Note: for more information


refer to the GPRS QoS follow
up expert training

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 245

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.10 Quality of Service [cont.]


1 1 246

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Use GSM indicators in order to complete the analysis of GPRS QoS


 Example :

 high number of TBF establishment failures due to radio problems =>

check with GSM counters if there are interferences (quality HO,


interference HO)

 Use GSM counters in order to complete the analysis of the impact of

GPRS traffic on GSM QoS


 Example :

 CCCH load due to GSM and GPRS


 TCH Erlang

 TCH Congestion (call establishment and incoming HO)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 246

6 (E)GPRS Network design

6.10 Quality of Service [cont.]


1 1 247

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 OMC-R indicator comparison

 According to GSM, QoS indicators for the Air interface available for GPRS
 Indicators based on counters, computed by the MFS, transferred to the

OMC-R

GSM

Radio interface indi- Call setup


cator
rate

success TBF establishment success


rate

Call success rate


Call drop rate

GPRS

TBF normal release rate


Abnormal TBF release

Note: To obtain the QoS for GPRS, it is not sufficient to study only the GPRS
indicators. There is always an influence of GSM service on GPRS service, e.g.
TCH congestion in GSM could be influenced by high CS traffic or the additional
high packed data traffic.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 247

1 1 248

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS target

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 248

7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target

7.1 General

1 1 249

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 GSM QoS and Interference problems if existing shall be fixed, e.g. by


 Introduction of Frequency Hopping
 GSM Power Control (UL)

 If the GPRS QoS is still not reached, then

 New GPRS features as mentioned in next slides shall be introduced

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 249

7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target

7.1 Optimization campaign on parameters


1 1 250

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 If still the GPRS QoS requirement is not fulfilled, then an

optimization campaign on parameters has to be started

 Use of unique values of (GPRS) parameter settings has to be checked


 Use of latest Alcatel default parameters

 Optimize parameters for the different GPRS features, if implemented in

the network

 TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier) from hardware point of view can be

considered to increase UL throughput, see also GPRS power control


topic

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 250

7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target

7.2 MPDCH

1 1 251

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 MPDCH and SPDCH Planning

 The enabling of MPDCH and the decision to allocate them dynamic or

static is depending on

Traffic capacity the operator has for GSM and GPRS


Traffic capacity the operator can reserve directly to GPRS
 Amount of traffic for GSM (Voice, SMS signaling, Location Area Update signaling)
and GPRS (data, signaling, Routing Area Update signaling)
 Subscriber distribution per service and area
 Mobility (cell reselection) of users during GPRS transfer



EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 251

7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target

7.2 MPDCH [cont.]

1 1 252

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Planning Recommendation on MPDCH

 Till the penetration rate of GPRS MS, which support master channel feature,

is unclear the MPDCH should be not enabled




So it is guaranteed that all GPRS mobiles in the network can access for GPRS
service. MS, which do not support MPDCH, cannot access the GPRS service if
MPDCH is enabled. Note: MPDCH can be enabled in network mode of operation:
NMO I and NMO III.
L o w p rio rity fo r G P R S o r
lo w G P R S tra ffic ?
YES
NO MPDCH

NO
S ta tic M P D C H

(D y n a m ic M P D C H )

G P R S sig n a lin g
c o n g e stio n
YES

NO

E n a b le s e c o n d a ry M P D C H s d e p e n d in g o n
G P R S s ig n a lin g n e e d

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 252

7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target

7.2 MPDCH [cont.]

1 1 253

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Traffic dependent recommendation (with respect to condition for

MPDCH):

 Low GPRS traffic




If GPRS traffic is low no Primary Master Channel needs to be activated

Static Primary Master channel

 High GPRS traffic





If the available TS are not scarce


Operator wants the GPRS MS to perform autonomous cell re-selection based on C31 and
C32 criterion

Dynamic Primary Master Channel




If the CS signaling channels CCCH getting overloaded due to high GPRS traffic and
signaling in addition to CS signaling

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 253

7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target

7.3 Enhanced PDCH Adaptation & Fast pre-emption


Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

!!! New in B9 !!!

1 1 254

 Feature Smooth/Enhanced PDCH Adaptation is recommended to

be enabled, leads to higher GPRS QoS [B7]


 There are no parameter to control this feature in B9.
 Soft Pre-emption

 T1 reallocation of TBF's whose PACCH is supported by a preempted time

slot
 T1 reallocation of TBF's whose MEGCH link becomes too small (basic
nibbles are allocated to the CS calls)

 Fast pre-emption

 After T_PDCH_Pre-emption = 4s

Soft pre-empted PDCH's are released


 Other "locked" PDCH's are released


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

Locked PDCH = PDCH's that are required by the BSC to the MFS for CS calls

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 254

7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target

7.4 User multiplexing

1 1 255

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The strategy of the TBF resource sharing is to use the PDCH resources

in a most effective way, that means not to waste a PDCH just with
one user and therefore to limit the available PS capacity. On the
other hand, the more users (different TBFs) share a PDCH, the less
effective the data flow and the longer the download or upload time is

 Trade-off between radio resource capacity sharing and optimum data

throughput

 Since GSM speech service users are still to be preferred, it is

recommended to set N_MAX_UL/DL_TBF_PDCH 1 (e.g.=2)




E.g. if N_MAX_DL_TBF_PDCH and CS-2 is used, the DL bit rate per MS will be
6.0 kbit/s (=12/2) per used timeslot for this MS

 If operators goal is to maximize the PS throughput then

N_MAX_UL/DL_TBF_PDCH = 1 (default value) is recommended

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 255

7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target

7.5 PDCH Resource Multiplexing


1 1 256

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Multislot access is the allocation of more than one PDCH to one MS

(multislot access). However to prevent one multislot MS to use too


many PDCHs each time it wants to transmit data (detriment of other
users), following parameter is used:
 MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF : Maximum number of PDCHs, which can be

allocated to a single TBF (or MS)




Range: [1..5], default value: 5 (todays MS capabilities)

 Radio Network Planning Impacts




A few multi slot mobiles can occupy all resources with the default value of
MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF. Thus the parameter has to be set, depending from the
expected load and in combination with N_TBF_PER_S/MPDCH to reflect
operators strategy on GPRS QoS.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 256

7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target

7.6 Radio (TBF) Resource Reallocation


1 1 257

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 With the feature TBF reallocation, the radio resources allocated to a

TBF can be changed during TBF lifetime, which increases successful


and efficient TS allocation (according to multislot capability) during
ongoing data transfer for PS case.

 Radio Network Planning Impacts

 EN_RES_REALLOCATION is enabling / disabling the Radio Resource

reallocation feature per trigger and per BSS


 All event triggers for TBF resource reallocation shall be considered:
Trigger
Trigger
 Trigger
 Trigger



T1
T2
T3
T4 (new in B8 for EGPRS purposes)

!!! B9 : this feature is always activated !!!


Not changeable !
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 Trigger T1 (target maintain a TBF alive when its PACCH is fast preempted):

Reallocate all impacted TBFs using the pre-empted PDCHs instead of releasing them using the
Packet TBF Release procedure

 Trigger T2 (target attempt offering more PDCHs to an MS upon concurrent TBF establishment):

get rid of the concurrence constraints imposed by the multislot class of the MS and an existing TBF
to offer the best throughput, the initial TBF can be moved to other PDCHs

 Trigger T3 (target periodically attempt offering more PDCHs to an MS which has a TBF in the

direction of the bias with less PDCHs than it can support according to its multislot class):

take benefit of PDCH resource usage variations in a cell to reallocate the resources granted to a
Mobile Station, in case those resources were not using the full multislot class capabilities of the MS
to offer the best throughput in the direction of the bias and even adapt to bias changes in the
course of a packet transfer

Parameters for trigger T3 :

- T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC: Timer value controlling the time duration between successive


resource reallocation attempts for candidate MSs with the trigger T3

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 257

7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target

7.6 Radio (TBF) Resource Reallocation [cont.]


1 1 258

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Advantages

 The advantage of the feature TBF resource reallocation is to serve a

better PDCH allocation to a TBF (throughput can be optimized),


according to the available radio, transmission, DSP and CPU resources,
during establishment and lifetime of TBF

 Drawback

 The allocation process is based on the number of PDCHs that the TBF can

be mapped on a new resource and not on the throughput the TBF will get
on these PDCHs
Consequence: in certain cases, available PDCHs will not be used for TBF
reallocation, whilst using them would have improved the TBF throughput

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 258

7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target

7.7 Coding Scheme Adaptation


1 1 259

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Different quality threshold are introduced since B7 to optimize

coding scheme adaptation algorithm

 Radio Network Planning Impacts

 Recommendation: Enable Coding scheme adaptation mechanism in GPRS

RLC acknowledged, un-acknowledged mode with parameters


EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK/EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACK
 Default parameter setting = enable.

 If the network interference is low it allows to start CS-2 usage at the

beginning of a TBF:

 TBF_UL/DL_INIT_CS = CS-2 (default setting = CS-2)

 TBF_UL/DL_INIT_MCS = MCS-6 (default setting = MCS-3)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 259

7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target

7.8 Cell Reselection

1 1 260

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Network control order (NC) parameter defines cell reselection mode,

GMM state and the presence of PBCCH in the serving cell.


Network Control
Order parameter

NC0
NC1
NC2

MS GMM State

Mode of cell reselection

Presence of
the PBCCH

Absence of the PBCCH

Standby

MS autonomous cell
reselection (NC0 mode)

C1, C31, C32

C1, C2

Ready

MS autonomous cell
reselection (NC0 mode)

C1, C31, C32

C1, C2

Standby

MS autonomous cell
reselection (NC0 mode)

Not supported in B8

Ready
(or RMM Mode = PTM)

Network controlled
reselection (NC2 mode)

C1, C2
C1, C2

 Independent from the presence of the MPDCH:

 GPRS cell adjacencies are same in packet idle mode as in packet transfer

mode
 GPRS cell adjacencies are set equal to the GSM cell adjacencies (i.e. the
BA(GPRS) list = BA(BCCH) list )
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 260

7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target

7.8 Cell Reselection [cont.]


1 1 261

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Radio Network Planning Impacts

 Possible to reselect a cell without GPRS service (if in the target cell GPRS

is disabled)
 Recommendation : enable the GPRS service on all cells in order to
prevent a MS to reselect a cell without GPRS support
 "NC0" Cell reselection criterion for PBCCH established or not

 MS triggers GPRS reselection according to GSM reselection criteria (C1,

C2)
 Radio Network Planning Impacts

Generally optimized GSM/CS parameters for cell reselection shall be kept also
for PS cell reselection
 Default values for the parameters are kept


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 261

7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target

7.8 GPRS Power Control

1 1 262

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Compatibility of GSM and GPRS UL Power control

 For GPRS rollouts it is recommended to disable the GPRS UL PC by

setting: =0 and TNX=0


 The reasons why GPRS UL PC shall be disabled:

MS controlled open loop PC is not working reliably (MS software


implementation)
 Field tests show a better throughput performance since the acknowledge
message is sent in UL with full power
 Remark: It is possible to deactivate GPRS UL power control (GCH=0 and a=0)
and to let GSM UL power control activated (EN_MS_PC=enabled, default),
different power control parameters for GSM and GPRS


 Increase UL GPRS throughput

 If TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier) is used and UL GPRS PC is disabled on

a site than better throughput in UL is expected

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 262

7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target

7.8 Features on DL TBF establishment and release


1 1 263

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 3 different features are presented which preemptively delay the TBF

release to speed up the setup of subsequent TBF


 Delayed DL TBF release

 Fast DL TBF re-establishment


 Non DRX Mode

 Their success depends on the users download behavior e.g. how

often pages are changed and the content of the downloaded http
looks like. For Web browsing and WAP applications where the PS
traffic is bursty, the gain of the features to delay TBF release will be
very high
 The 3 features are complementary and can be activated
independently from each other. Delays to start download of new LLC
PDU depending on feature

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 263

7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target

7.8.1 Delayed DL TBF release


1 1 264

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 This feature should be enabled if there is no lack of resources to

achieve higher user application throughput

 Main beneficiaries will be the applications consecutive pings, WAP and

HTTP (clustered web page). The round trip time (RTT) can be shortened
by the availability of an already opened TBF. This, in turn, is affected by
the TBF hold time and the time between pings
 So in fact less signaling is needed for e.g. download of successive WAP
pages or HTTP links because there is no need to establish a new TBF
during T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL time
 T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL should be in between of 1.5s up to 2s depending
on available resources in the cell. The higher the TS capacity in a cell is
the higher the value of T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL can be tuned
T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME T3192

DL TBF
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning

DRX_TIMER_MAX

Non-DRX mode

DL TBF establishment
via PCH or PPCH
of MS paging group

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

p.82

During the delayed release of the DL TBF, the BSS periodically sends to the MS a DL RLC data block (with a
polling request) containing a Dummy UI Command which is a LLC PDU whose checksum is deliberately
wrong. This LLC PDU is hence discarded by the LLC layer of the MS.
Sending periodically Dummy UI Commands enables the mobile station to request an UL TBF establishment in
a PACKET DL Ack/Nack message if it has data to send, and prevents defense RLC timers from expiring in the
mobile station.
If new DL LLC PDUs are received for that MS, the DL LLC PDUs can be sent immediately on the DL TBF. If
the BSS does not receive any DL LLC PDU during the inactivity period, it releases the DL TBF through the
normal TBF release procedure.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 264

7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target

7.8.1 Delayed DL TBF release [cont.]


1 1 265

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Delayed Downlink TBF release -> Total TBF release time is:
 T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL_RADIO +

T_Delayed_DL_TBF_Rel = T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME (= 1600ms)


T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME.

= 800 ms + 700 ms (defaults) = 1500 ms if delayed DL TBF Release is enabled by


parameter EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL

 Advantage

 no delay to start DL data transfer for new DL LLC PDUs


 less signaling

 throughput improved for reason: long RTT. RTT can be shortened by the

availability of an already opened TBF. This, in turn, is affect by the TBF


hold time, and the time between pings.

 Drawback

 waste of resources, TBF is kept open during delayed downlink time,

available USF values are limited

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 265

7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target

7.8.2 Fast Downlink TBF re-establishment process


1 1 266

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Fast Downlink TBF re-establishment process

 After reception of the final block by the MS and after the sending of the

last PACKET DL ACK/NACK message, the MS still listens on the PACCH


during T3192 sec
 BSS re-establishes a DL TBF on the PACCH of the previous DL TBF (i.e. to
send a PACKET DL ASSIGNMENT message on the PACCH)
 fast DL TBF re-establishment without impacting the (P)CCCH resources;
i.e. a new TBF is established but with the parameters of the old TBF
(TFI, TAI)
 Rules

 T3192 > MS-BSS roundtrip delay + RRBP maximum duration (120 ms)
 T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay < 5 sec

 Default Values

 T3192 = 1000ms when non-DRX mode is not activated


 T3192 = 500ms when non-DRX mode is active

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

Relative Reserved Block Period : waiting time before UL emission (=> for PACCH) is allowed (cf. USF
mechanism)
RRBP : +3RB, +4RB, +5RB or +6RB (approx)

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 266

7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target

7.8.3 Non-DRX feature

1 1 267

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Non-DRX feature benefits

 Continuous monitoring of AGCH messages by the MS

 The MFS establishes a DL TBF on the first available AGCH block (without

MPDCH) or the first PPCH occurrence (with MPDCH)


 Higher downlink throughput and shorter transfer delay for cell
reselection and bursty download application (HTTP, WAP).
 Radio Network Planning Impacts

 DRX_TIMER_MAX = 2s (Max = 4s)  Non-DRX mode possible for 2 seconds


 If Non-DRX feature possible, influence on following parameters settings:

BS_AG_BLKS_RES, BS_PA_MFRMS, T_PDA, T_PUA, T_GPRS_assign_AGCH


 T_GPRS_assign_AGCH parameter can be found in the memo
MND/TD/SYT/EBR/0342.2001.


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

 In B7, the default value was set to 0.7 s

The discontinuous (DRX) mode applies when the MS is in packet idle mode. This function allows a MS not to
monitor all PCCCH blocks, but only blocks defined by its paging group. The MS applies existing GSM DRX
procedures if there is no MPDCH.
Remove 0.6 seconds, due to AGCH queuing time. So real time in non-DRX is 1.4s.

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 267

1 1 268

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

8 GPRS introduction into operational GSM network

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 268

8 introduction into operational GSM network

8.1 General

1 1 269

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Following aspects are considered if GPRS is introduced into a mature

GSM network without network design changes

 Different to the approach of GPRS Greenfield planning

 If the operator foresees design changes due to GPRS QoS requirements

than traffic analysis and GPRS network design tasks has to be done
before the GPRS introduction step

 Actual status of the GSM network


 GSM QoS and Interference


All GSM network enhancement features and GSM network problems, mainly
GSM QoS and interference, shall be fixed before GPRS is implemented

 New network design/frequency planning




If a new network design and frequency planning is developed to improve GSM


QoS and interference, then the implementation of this design should be done
before GPRS is implemented

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 269

8 introduction into operational GSM network

8.1 General [cont.]

1 1 270

Tasks before GPRS


Introduction

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

GSM QoS and Interference


problems?
no
New Frequency plan foreseen?

no
Actual GSM capacity enough to
cope with GSM and GPRS traffic?

yes

GSM problem fixing

yes

Implement Frequency
Plan

no

Increase capacity

How to reach
GPRS QoS?

GPRS
Introduction

yes

yes

Introduction of GPRS and


related features/settings.

GSM QoS and Interference


problems

Check GPRS throughput map

no
Add new GPRS features if needed

RA planning
CAE data generation
GPRS QoS reached?
Considerable features to reach
GPRS QoS target

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

no

Optimize GPRS parameters if


needed

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 270

8 introduction into operational GSM network

8.1 General [cont.]

1 1 271

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Occurred traffic and handled traffic balance


 GPRS QoS requirements

 Operator requirements define the needed GPRS capacity and GPRS QoS

per user in relation to specific definitions for user and used service:
Volume @BH (Kbytes)
 Page size (Kbytes)
 Queue delay (seconds)
 Quantile (%)
 Bit rate (kbit/s)


 Expected GPRS traffic

 The calculation of expected GPRS traffic has to be done before


 Following results will be then available:



TS needed for CS traffic and signaling in DL/UL and


TS needed for PS traffic and signaling in DL/UL

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 271

8 introduction into operational GSM network

8.1 General [cont.]

1 1 272

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Amount of TS, TRX's & frequencies needed :


 If resources are enough for GSM and GPRS


TRX assignment to GPRS service and the PDCH planning can be done.

 If resources are not enough for GSM and GPRS

Additional TRX & frequencies must be allocated to the sites with not enough
traffic capacity.
 A new frequency planning should be done when a not negligible amount of new
frequencies have to be added to a planning area to fulfill (GSM+GPRS) capacity
requirements.


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 272

8 introduction into operational GSM network

8.1 General [cont.]

1 1 273

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Introduction of GPRS and related features/settings

 The prerequisites for a GPRS analysis are following tasks


 Field strength prediction
 Interference analysis

 If new sites after GPRS analysis are required to fulfill operators GPRS

requirements, a new frequency planning with a certain frequency band


range planning has to be done.

 Routing area, CAE data

 The routing area (RA) planning is a must for GPRS introduction into GSM

network, see chapter 7 for details on RA planning and CAE data


generation.

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 273

8 introduction into operational GSM network

8.1 General [cont.]

1 1 274

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 GPRS QoS increasing tasks to be done are depending on dimensions

of QoS requirements. What kind of tasks and references can be done


to increase GPRS QoS ? As seen earlier :

 Dedicated TRX for GPRS in a cell can be done if TRX number in the cell is

2
 Introduction of GPRS Master channels (MPDCH to separate GPRS and GSM
signaling
 Open question: Penetration rate of GPRS MS which can decode MPDCH
 The parameters for PDCH dynamic allocation (and TBF resource
management) depends on GPRS QoS requirements :


Weaker GPRS requirements  more TS for GSM can be reserved with a low
value of MAX_PDCH

 For GSM tasks see next slides

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 274

1 1 275

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

9 GSM Network enhancement features & GPRS

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 275

9 GSM network enhancement features & GPRS

9.1 Frequency Hopping


1 1 276

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The dependency between FH usage and Coding scheme distribution

and the consequences on CS1-CS3 and CS 4

 Generally Frequency Hopping (FH) leads to Interference averaging. Thus







calls having good quality will get worse, bad calls will get better. This is
valid for GSM, similar it is valid for GPRS.
CS1 is used in bad conditions, thus it will be improved if FH is
introduced.
CS4 is used in very good conditions, which are more seldom in a hopping
network. Thus CS4 will perform less good and will be used more seldom.
The overall gain of CS1 - CS3 will depend on the C/I situation before and
after FH.
CS adaptation parameters can be tuned more optimistic in respect to
throughput and Coding Scheme if FH is used:


CS_QUAL_XX_1_2_FH_Z > CS_QUAL_XX_1_2_NFH_Z

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 276

9 GSM network enhancement features & GPRS

9.1 Frequency Hopping [cont.]


1 1 277

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 GPRS load and GPRS performance

 GSM + GPRS load increases  Higher probability for interference

 Because GPRS performance is mainly based on C/I  it will reduce the

performance.

 Radio Network Planning Impacts

 To reduce the load in the network/cell following GSM activities can be

started:

Adding more resources, frequencies


Make smaller cell sizes (e.g. achieved by stronger tilt)
 Do proper cell planning



EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 277

9 GSM network enhancement features & GPRS

9.2 -cell

1 1 278

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The main advantage of a -cell environment may be a better

frequency re-use possibility, thus better C/I value and higher


throughput can be expected (especially for E-GPRS with higher C/I
requirements than GPRS s). Following two steps is proposed for GPRS
implementation
 1. Step: GPRS traffic is low => introduction of GPRS for macro
and -cell together
 Disadvantages in both layers :



Emergency capacity on macro cell layer reduced

Higher blocking probability on -cell layer for CS traffic

 Solution:



Reduction of the maximum GPRS capacity of the -cell to 30-50% by


parameters setting
Tuning of the GPRS user access handling (TBF and PDCH share)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 278

9 GSM network enhancement features & GPRS

9.2 -cell [cont.]

1 1 279

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Step 2: Increasing GPRS traffic => network densification


 Measures:

Hardware : TRX upgrade, -cell and macro cell densification, site


design
Parameter: GPRS capacity and user access handling tuning




Basis: OMC-R Load measurements and GPRS customer behavior (location)


Assumption: 80% of packet data traffic is static, 20% is dynamic (driving)

The strategy is also valid for a different assumption, but this assumption is
more probable.

!!! Activate Outgoing Redirection from MICRO !!!


EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(Umbrella) = Enable
NC_DL_RXLEV_THR(Micro) = -47 dBm
NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE(Umbrella) = at the expiry of the GMM Ready timer
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 279

9 GSM network enhancement features & GPRS

9.3 Dual Band

1 1 280

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The consequence for the PDCH configuration will be explained

related to Alcatels dual band approaches.


 Reminder:

there are no HO in GPRS for PS services


 supported MS classes to be checked


 Two Approaches

 Multiband BSS approach

 Multiband cell approach

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 280

9 GSM network enhancement features & GPRS

9.3 Dual Band [cont.]

1 1 281

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Multiband BSS approach

 A dedicated BCCH for each cell/frequency band

 Class B and C MSs can make interband cell reselection during data

transmission




if C2 parameters are used in order to give a higher priority to a given layer for
circuit mode
the same priority is obtained for packet mode

thus GPRS can not be kept in 900 MHz layer, if GSM MS is sent to 1800 MHz
layer

 therefore PS functionality should be configured in both bands

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 281

9 GSM network enhancement features & GPRS

9.3 Dual Band [cont.]

1 1 282

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Multiband cell approach

 TRXs of one band are allocated to the outer zone and the TRXs of the

other band to the inner zone.


 The BCCH is configured to the outer zone. The principle is similar to the
concentric cell ones.
 During PS traffic, class B and C MSs will always be served by the outer
zone GPRS TRX.



if C2 parameters are used in order to give a higher priority to a given layer for
circuit mode the same priority is obtained for packet mode

if GSM MS is sent to inner zone in dedicated mode, the GPRS service cannot be
ensured in the inner zone

 PS functionality in outer zone only

 No use of C2 to give a higher priority to non-GPRS layer

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 282

9 GSM network enhancement features & GPRS

9.4 Concentric cell

1 1 283

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 For the two possible cases:

 Concentric cells which are disturbing other cells:


 the

inner zone is smaller than the outer zone and keeps the disturbing
carriers
 concentric cells which are disturbed by other cells:
 the inner zone and outer zone carriers have the same output powers;
nevertheless, the size of the inner zone is dimensioned by proper
parameter setting
 the same recommendation holds: the TRX for PS traffic must be
configured in the outer zone of the concentric cell

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 283

1 1 284

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

10 E-GPRS

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 284

10 E-GPRS

10.1 E-GPRS main differences


1 1 285

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 E-GPRS main differences


 TRX output power
 RX sensitivity

EDGE timeslot
8PSK TX power
Reference sensitivity

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

GSM900
GSM1800
15 W or 41.76 dBm
12 W or 40.8 dBm
(tolerance 0.5 + 0.5 dB)
(tolerance -0.5 + 0.5 dB)
-112 dBm (static MCS-1)
108 dBm (TU50 ideal FH, MCS1)
-104 dBm (static MCS-5)
- 100 dBm (TU50 ideal FH, MCS5)

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 285

10 E-GPRS

10.1 E-GPRS main differences [cont.]


1 1 286

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

MCS-9

60

MCS-8
MCS-7
MCS-6

Throughput [kbps]

50

MCS-5
MCS-4
MCS-3

40

MCS-2
MCS-1

30

20

10

0
-110

-105

-100

-95

-90

Level [dBm]
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 286

-85

10 E-GPRS

10.1 E-GPRS main differences [cont.]


1 1 287

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

60

MCS-9
MCS-8
MCS-7
MCS-6
MCS-5
MCS-4
MCS-3
MCS-2
MCS-1

Throughput [kbps]

50
40
30
20
10
0 0

10

15

20

25

30

C/Ico(dB)
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 287

35

1 1 288

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

11 GPRS traffic calculation example

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 288

11 GPRS traffic calculation example

11.1 Customer questionnaire (Example) [cont.]


1 1 289

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 1. Total amount of GSM subscribers in the network (CS+PS subscribers)


 1Mio

 2. Blocking at air interface (speech)


 2%

 3. Speech traffic per subscriber (mErl/sub)


 20 mErl/Sub rural,

 25 mErl/Sub urban

 4. Distribution of CS subscribers to different morpho classes


 80% urban
 20% rural)

 5. Percentage of GPRS subscribers


 7% of total GSM subscribers

 6. Busy hour occurrence for speech traffic and packet data traffic:
 Speech traffic busy hour: 8-11, 13-17 and 18-22 oclock

 Packet data service hours: Business: 8-11 and 14-17, private 14-20 oclock

 7. and 8. see table


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 289

11 GPRS traffic calculation example

11.1 Customer questionnaire (Example) [cont.]


1 1 290

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

9. PS user behaviour/distribution:

 daily GPRS user profile activity (days/month):


 business

22 days,
30 days
 GPRS user profiles percentage (%), related to the total GPRS
 subscriber number = 7%: 2% private and 5 % business
 Geographical percentage distribution (%) of GPRS user profiles related to
morphostructure:
 urban = 70% business, 50% private
 rural = 30% business, 50% private
 10. Number of BTS in the existing network
 2000 BTSs
 11. Distribution of existing BTS to morphoclasses:
 1200 BTSs in urban,
 800 in rural
 12. Number of TRX/BTS, in accordance to morphoclass:
 3*2 configuration in urban, 3*1 configuration in rural
 private

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 290

11 GPRS traffic calculation example

11.2 User and area distribution determination


1 1 291

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 According the questionnaire, the GPRS user distribution will be

calculated
 Due to the different network capacity in urban and rural area and
the different ratio of business and private users in the area, the
GPRS and speech subscriber are split to urban and rural area

Packet data

GPRS share 7% total


Urban area
Rural area

Speech

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

Total GSM subscriber: 1 Mio


Business
Private
5% (50000 subs.)
2% (20000 subs.)
70% (35000)
50% (10000)
30% (15000)
50% (10000)

Total CS subscriber: 1 Mio


Urban area
80% (800000 subs.)
Rural area
20% (200000 subs)
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 291

11 GPRS traffic calculation example

11.3 Traffic demand for CS traffic


1 1 292

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The traffic demand for CS subscribers


 2% blocking during the busy hour
 Urban area 25 mErlang/Subs.
 Rural area 20 mErlang/Subs.

Traffic [Erlang]


Total CS subscriber: 1 Mio


Urban area
Rural area
20000
4000

Assumption: Homogeneous traffic distribution in each morpho class

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 292

11 GPRS traffic calculation example

11.4 Traffic demand for packet traffic


1 1 293

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The traffic demand for PS is calculated in two steps:

 First step: throughput demand per user profile calculation (due to the

different user behaviours)


 Second step: Relation of throughput demand to the total subscriber
amount in urban and rural area
 Assumptions:

packet data traffic per month is user profile depending (e.g. not during the
whole month, like speech traffic)
 PS traffic is not to be spread over the whole day, there are now service
hours/day, depending on the user profile
 Packet data traffic occurs only during the service hours.
 Packet data traffic is homogeneously distributed over the service hours,
 During service hours, the user is continuously active (worst case calculation)


EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 293

11 GPRS traffic calculation example

11.4 Traffic demand for packet traffic [cont.]


1 1 294

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 What is the busy hour?

 1. CS traffic is maximum

 2. PS traffic is also maximum in that period

 Exception:
 CS

 PS

and PS busy hour not overlapping -> separate dimensioning


Reserve still sufficient capacity for CS during PS busy hour!

user profile service hours not overlapping

Use

user profile with highest throughput demand

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 294

11 GPRS traffic calculation example

11.4 Traffic demand for packet traffic [cont.]


1 1 295

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 In our example, the service hours for PS traffic are in total 6 hours,

but from 14 to17 oclock business and private subscriber will make
data traffic at the same time
 Thus the busy hours for data traffic are these 3 hours
 It is also visible, that during that time, also for speech traffic a busy
time occurs
 Busy hour: GPRS traffic dimensioning will be 14 to17
 Speech
 Packet



11

1314

Business
Private

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 295

17

20

22

11 GPRS traffic calculation example

11.4 Traffic demand for packet traffic [cont.]


1 1 296

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Packet data throughput demand (user profile):


Business
8.124
68149.05=
8.124*1024*1024*8/1000
3097.68
=68149.05/22 days
0.14
=3097.68/(6 hrs*3600)
0.14
during 3 busy hours

Traffic/month [Mbyte]
Traffic/month [kbit]
traffic volume demand /day
[kbit]
throughput demand /service
hours [kbit/s]
throughput demand /busy hours
[kbit/s]

 Packet data throughput demand (total network):


throughput demand
/busy hours [kbit/s]
Total:

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

Urban area
Business
Private
4900
300
5200

Rural area
Business
Private
2100
300
2400

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 296

Private
2.380
=19964.88
665.49
for 30 days
0.03
6 serv. hours
0.03
during 3 busy hrs

11 GPRS traffic calculation example

11.5 Network capacity calculation


1 1 297

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 For CS traffic:
Total BTS
BTS
Configuration
Capacity/Erlang 2%
Blocking
CS traffic demand

Urban area
1200
3x2
29520
=1200*3*8.2
20000

2000

Rural area
800
3x1
6960
=800*3*2.9
4000

 The actual network capacity is sufficient to handle the CS traffic during

the busy hour by assuming a maximal blocking probability of 2%

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 297

11 GPRS traffic calculation example

11.5 Network capacity calculation [cont.]


1 1 298

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Network throughput capacity for PS traffic:

 The network throughput capacity for PS traffic is based on the cell

throughput capacity
 For this dimensioning example it is appropriate to consider the result of
the cell ranges dimensioning example
 According to it, 59% of the cell area is operated in CS-2 and 41% in CS-1
mode
 The cell throughput capacity can be estimated with a data rate of
(0.41*8+0.59*12) kbit/s = 10.36 kbit/s per timeslot

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 298

11 GPRS traffic calculation example

11.5 Network capacity calculation [cont.]


1 1 299

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 The network capacity is depending from the allocated TS for PDCH

use:

 parameter MAX_PDCH in cell's CS normal load situation

 parameter MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD in cell's CS high load


 parameter MIN_PDCH (optional)

 Example:

 MAX_PDCH is set to 8 TS for the 3x2 BTS configuration (2nd TRX

allocated for GPRS),


 MAX_PDCH for the 3x1 BTS, only 7 TS can be allocated for packet data
(TS 0 is reserved for BCCH)
 MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD =1 (Under CS high load conditions, only one TS
will be present for packet data usage)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 299

11 GPRS traffic calculation example

11.5 Network capacity calculation [cont.]


1 1 300

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

Total BTS
BTS
Configuration
Total Available TS, BCCH not incl.
Available TS, BCCH not incl.
MAX_PDCH_GROUP = 8 TS
Available TS if BSC in HIGH_LOAD
MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD = 1 TS
Capacity [kbit/s]
(10.36 kbit/s /TS)
Capacity [kbit/s]
if BSC in HIGH_LOAD (10.36 kbit/s /TS)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

Urban area
1200
3x2
54000
=(7+8)*3*1200
28800
=8*3*1200
3600
=28800/8
298368
=28800*10.36
37296
=3600*10.36

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 300

2000

Rural area
800
3x1
16800
=7*3*300
16800
=7*3*800
2400
=16800/7
174048
24864

11 GPRS traffic calculation example

11.6 Traffic dimensioning


1 1 301

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Allocating TS to GPRS traffic reduces the capacity within the circuit

switched design
 For the busy hour, the BSC is in high load situation, i.e the maximum
of PDCHs is equal to MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD (resource control)
 The following table gives the CS capacities based on a blocking
probability of 2% (in Erlang), according to the amount of allocated
timeslots for GPRS in BSC high load situation
Amount
of TRX
1 TRX
2 TRX
3 TRX
4 TRX
5 TRX
6 TRX

Amount
SDCCH
1
2
3
4
4
5

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

Amount
TCH
+PDCH
7
14
21
28
36
43

2.93
8.2
14.03
20.15
27.34
33.75

2.27
7.4
13.18
19.26
26.43
32.83

1.65
6.61
12.33
18.38
25.52
31.91

Amount PDCH
3
4

1.09
5.84
11.49
17.50
24.62
30.99

0.6
5.08
10.65
16.63
23.72
30.08

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 301

0.2
4.34
9.82
15.76
22.82
29.16

0.02
3.62
9.01
14.89
21.93
28.25

0
2.93
8.2
14.03
21.03
27.34

11 GPRS traffic calculation example

11.6 Traffic dimensioning [cont.]


1 1 302

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 MAX_PDCH_Group = 8 or 7

 MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD = 1

 Network capacity for CS and PS traffic (1 TS for PS):

Speech

Packet
data

number of BTS
Configuration
Capacity/Erlang @2 % Blocking
Capacity/Erlang @2% Blocking and 1 PDCH
CS traffic demand [Erl]
Capacity [kbit/s] (10.36 kbit/s /TS)
Capacity [kbit/s] if BSC in HIGH_LOAD
(10.36 kbit/s /TS)
PD busy hour throughput demand [kbit/s]

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 302

Total BTS =2000


Urban area
Rural area
1200
800
3x2
3x1
29520
6960
26640
5448
=1200*3*7.4
=800*3*2.27
20000
4000
298368
174048
37296
24864
5200

2400

11 GPRS traffic calculation example

11.6 Traffic dimensioning [cont.]


1 1 303

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Conclusions:

 Network is able to serve CS traffic.

 One TS is necessary to handle PS traffic.

 One TS is sufficient for PS traffic during the busy hour.


 No CS service degradation during busy hour.


The reservation of 1 TS for PS traffic represents no service degradation for CS


traffic, since the remaining network capacity is still sufficient to handle the CS
traffic.
To guarantee a permanent PS service independent form the load situation, the
parameter Min_PDCH_GROUP was set to 1 (I.e. 1 TS/ cell is permanently
reserved for PS service and not available for CS traffic),
however Min_PDCH_GROUP = 0 is recommended (load reduction on Atermux
interface)

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 303

11 GPRS traffic calculation example

11.6 Traffic dimensioning [cont.]


1 1 304

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 Further iterations would be necessary (increase of

MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD) if the PS traffic demand could not be


handled with MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD = 1 timeslot
 Further, if the CS traffic demand could not be handled with the
remaining timeslots some measures are necessary e.g.:
 add a TRX to the considered serving cell

 shrink the cell size of the serving cell (e.g. introduce downtilt) and

increase the cell size of a neighbouring cell which offers sufficient


capacity to handle the traffic demand surplus of the serving cell
 reduce interference (network changes) to get higher average throughput

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 304

11 GPRS traffic calculation example

11.6 Traffic dimensioning [cont.]


1 1 305

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

 In the Alcatel GPRS implementation step 1, the number of TRX's

which can be allocated to GPRS is maximum NTRXGPRS =1.


 In our worst case consideration, this TRX comes to its limit when the
packet throughput demand is higher than the throughput capacity
and cannot be satisfied even if the number of allocated TS for PS
reaches Max_PDCH_Group

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 305

Abbreviations and Acronyms


1 1 306

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

Switch
to notes
Access Point
Name view!

 ALMAP:

Protocol
Packet Control Unit
 AS: Alpha Server (Compaq)
 PDCH: Packet Data CHannel
 BG: Border Gateway
 PDN: Packet Data Network
 BSC: Base Station Controller
 PDP: Packet Data Protocol (IP or X25)
 BSS: Base Station Subsystem
 PDU: Protocol Data Unit
 BSCGP: BSC-GPRS Protocol
 PPCH: Packet- Paging CHannel
 BSSGP: BSS-GPRS Protocol
 PRACH: Packet- Random Access CHannel
 BVCI: BSSGP Virtual Connection Identifier
 PS: Packet Switching
 CCBS: Customer Care and Billing Center
 P-TMSI: Packet- Temporary Mobile Subscriber
 CCU: Channel Codec Unit
Identity
 CDR: Call Detail Record
 PVC: Permanent Virtual Circuit
 CG: Charging Gateway
 P-VLR: Packet- Visitors Location Register
 CS: Circuit Switching
 QoS: Quality of Service
 DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
 RA: Routing Area
 DL: Down Link
 RIP : Routing Information Protocol
 DLCI= Data Link Connection Identifier
 RLC: Radio Link Control
 DNS: Domain Name System
 RADIUS: Remote Authentication Dial In Use
 EDGE: Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution
Service
 FUMO : Frame Unit Module
 RRDTUF : Roaming Restriction Data Towards
 FR: Frame Relay
Unknown Foreign PLMN
 GPRS: General Packet Radio Service
 RRM: Radio Resource Management
 GGSN: Gateway GSN
 RSZ : Regional Subscription Zone
 GMM: GPRS Mobility Management
 SGSN: Serving GSN
 GR: GPRS Register
 SM: Session Management | Short Message
 GSL: GPRS Signaling Link
 SMS: Short Message Service
 GSM: Global System for Mobile communication
 SMS-C: SMS-Center
 GSN: GPRS Support Node
 SNDCP: Sub Network-Dependent Convergence
 GSS: GPRS
Sub-System
Protocol
EVOLIUM
BSS - GPRS
and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
 GTP:
GPRSPlanning
Tunneling Protocol
 SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol
Radio
Network
 HLR: Home Location Register
 SNS: Sub-Network Service layer
 HSCSD: High Speed Circuit-Switching Data
 TBF: Temporary Block Flow
 IMSI: International Mobile Subscriber Identity
 TC: Trans Coder
 IP: Internet Protocol
 TCH: Traffic CHannel
 ISDN : Integrated Service Digital Network
 TCP: Transmission Control Protocol
 ISP: Internet Service Provider
 TDMA: Time-Division Multiplexing Access
 LAN: Local Area Network
 TFI: Temporary block Flow Identifier
 LLC: Logical Link Control
 TID: Tunnel IDentity
 MAC: Medium Access Control
 TLLI: Temporary Logical Link Identity
 MFS: Multi-Bsc Fast packet Server
 TMN: Telecommunication Management Protocol
 MNRG: Mobile Not Reachable for Gprs
 TS: Time Slot
 MS: Mobile Station
 UDP: User Datagram protocol
 MSC: Mobile Switching Center
 UL: Up Link
 MT: Mobile Terminal
 UMTS: Universal Mobile Transmission System
 NE: Network Element
 WAP: Wireless Application Protocol
 NMC: Network Management Center
 WAN: Wide Area Network
 NNM: Network Node Manager
 NRPA : Network Requested PDP Context
Activation
 NSAPI: Network Service Access Point Identifier
 NSC: Network Service Control layer
 NSEI: Network Service Entity Identifier
 NSS: Network Sub-System
 NS-VC: Network Service- Virtual Circuit
 NTP: Network Time Protocol
 DB : On Demand Bandwidth
 OMC: Operation & Maintenance Center
 OS: Operation System
 PAGCH: Packet- Access Grant Channel
 PCCCH: Packet- Common Control Channel
 APN:

ALcatel MAnagement Platform

 PCO:
 PCU:

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 306

1 1 307

Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS

End of Module
EVOLIUM BSS GPRS and EGPRS

EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS


Radio Network Planning

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 307

También podría gustarte